mototrbo™ dgp™ 5550/dgp™ 8550 user guide

282
PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 COLOR DISPLAY PORTABLE USER GUIDE

Upload: leliem

Post on 04-Jan-2017

277 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO

MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550COLOR DISPLAY PORTABLEUSER GUIDE

Page 2: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE
Page 3: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

ContentsDeclaration of Conformity....................... 11

Important Safety Information........13

Software Version............................14

Computer Software Copyrights....15

Handling Precautions....................16

Getting Started...............................17How to Use This Guide..................................17What Your Dealer/System Administrator

Can Tell You.............................................17

Preparing Your Radio for Use.......19Charging the Battery......................................19Attaching the Battery..................................... 19Attaching the Antenna................................... 20Attaching the Belt Clip................................... 20Attaching the Universal Connector Cover

(Dust Cover)............................................. 21Powering Up the Radio..................................21Adjusting the Volume.....................................22

Identifying Radio Controls............23Radio Controls...............................................23Using the 4–Way Navigation Button..............24Using the Keypad.......................................... 25

Non-Connect Plus Operations......27

Additional Radio Controls inNon-Connect Plus Mode............28

Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................28Programmable Buttons..................................28

Contents

1

English

Page 4: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Assignable Radio Functions............... 29Assignable Settings or Utility

Functions....................................... 31Accessing the Programmed Functions..........31Identifying Status Indicators...........................32

Display Icons.......................................32Call Icons............................................ 34Advanced Menu Icons........................ 35Mini Notice Icons.................................35Sent Item Icons ...............................36Bluetooth Device Icons....................... 36Job Tickets Icons................................ 37LED Indicator...................................... 37Audio Tones........................................38Indicator Tones................................... 39

Switching Between Conventional Analogand Digital Mode.......................................39

IP Site Connect ......................................... 40Capacity Plus ............................................ 40Linked Capacity Plus .................................41

Making and Receiving Calls inNon-Connect Plus Mode............42

Selecting a Zone............................................42Selecting a Channel.......................................43

Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call... 43Receiving and Responding to a

Group Call......................................44Receiving and Responding to a

Private Call ................................. 44Receiving an All Call...........................45Receiving and Responding to a

Selective Call .............................46Receiving and Responding to a

Phone Call .................................. 46Making a Radio Call.......................................48

Making a Group Call........................... 49Making a Private Call ......................50Making an All Call............................... 51Making a Selective Call .................. 51Making a Phone Call with the One

Touch Access Button.....................52Making a Private Call with a One

Touch Call Button.......................... 54Making a Group, Private or All Call

with the Programmable NumberKey ............................................ 54

Making a Phone Call with theProgrammable Phone Button ..... 55C

onte

nts

2

English

Page 5: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Making a Call with theProgrammable Manual DialButton ......................................... 57

Stopping a Radio Call ................................60Talkaround.....................................................60Monitoring Features.......................................61

Monitoring a Channel..........................61Permanent Monitor............................. 62

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode....................63

Radio Check.................................................. 63Sending a Radio Check...................... 63

Remote Monitor............................................. 65Initiating Remote Monitor....................65Stopping Remote Monitor................... 66

Scan Lists...................................................... 67Viewing an Entry in the Scan List....... 67Viewing an Entry in the Scan List

by Alias Search..............................68Editing the Scan List........................... 68

Scan...............................................................72Starting and Stopping Scan................ 73Responding to a Transmission

During a Scan................................ 73

Deleting a Nuisance Channel............. 74Restoring a Nuisance Channel........... 74

Vote Scan ..................................................74Contact Settings............................................ 75

Making a Group Call from Contacts....76Making a Private Call from

Contacts .................................... 76Making a Phone Call from Contacts... 77Making a Call Alias Search .............80Assigning an Entry to a

Programmable Number Key ...... 81Removing the Association between

Entry and ProgrammableNumber Key ...............................82

Adding a New Contact........................ 83Setting a Default Contact ................84

Call Indicator Settings....................................84Activating and Deactivating Call

Ringers for Call Alert ................. 84Activating and Deactivating Call

Ringers for Private Calls ............85Activating and Deactivating Call

Ringers for Selective Call .......... 85Activating and Deactivating Call

Ringers for Text Message..............86

Contents

3

English

Page 6: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Activating and Deactivating CallRingers for Telemetry Statuswith Text........................................ 87

Assigning Ring Styles......................... 88Escalating Alarm Tone Volume...........88

Call Alert Operation....................................... 89Receiving and Responding to a

Call Alert........................................ 89Making a Call Alert from the

Contact List....................................89Making a Call Alert with the One

Touch Access Button.....................90Emergency Operation....................................90

Receiving an Emergency Alarm..........91Responding to an Emergency

Alarm............................................. 92Sending an Emergency Alarm............ 92Sending an Emergency Alarm with

Call.................................................93Sending an Emergency Alarm with

Voice to Follow .......................... 94Reinitiating an Emergency Mode........95Exiting Emergency Mode....................96

Analog Message Encode .......................... 96Sending MDC Message Encode to

Dispatcher......................................96

Sending 5–Tone Message Encodeto Contact...................................... 97

Analog Status Update ................................ 97Sending Status Update to

Predefined Contact........................ 97Viewing a 5-Tone Status Details.........98Editing 5–Tone Status Details.............98

Text Message Features .............................99Writing and Sending a Text

Message........................................ 99Sending a Quick Text Message

with the One Touch AccessButton.......................................... 100

Accessing the Drafts Folder..............100Managing Fail-to-Send Text

Messages.................................... 103Managing Sent Text Messages........ 105Receiving a Text Message................108Managing Received Text Messages.109

Job Tickets...................................................113Accessing the Job Ticket Folder.......113Responding to the Job Ticket........... 114Deleting a Job Ticket........................ 114

Privacy .....................................................115Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF)............ 117Multi-Site Controls ................................... 117

Con

tent

s

4

English

Page 7: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Starting an Automatic Site Search....117Stopping an Automatic Site Search.. 118Starting a Manual Site Search.......... 119

Security........................................................119Radio Disable....................................120Radio Enable.................................... 121

Lone Worker................................................ 123Password Lock Features............................. 123

Accessing the Radio fromPassword..................................... 123

Unlocking the Radio from LockedState............................................ 124

Turning the Password Lock On orOff................................................ 125

Changing the Password....................125Bluetooth Operation.....................................126

Turning Bluetooth On and Off...........127Finding and Connecting to a

Bluetooth Device..........................127Finding and Connecting from a

Bluetooth Device (DiscoverableMode)...........................................128

Disconnecting from a BluetoothDevice..........................................129

Switching Audio Route......................129Viewing Device Details..................... 129Editing Device Name........................ 130

Deleting Device Name...................... 130Bluetooth Mic Gain............................131

Notification List............................................ 131Accessing the Notification List.......... 131

Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS)............................................................ 132

Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP)............. 132Utilities......................................................... 133

Locking and Unlocking the Keypad.. 133Turning Keypad Tones On or Off......133Setting the Squelch Level................. 134Setting the Power Level....................135Turning the Option Board

Feature(s) On or Off.................... 135Identifying Cable Type...................... 135Turning the Voice Operating

Transmission (VOX) FeatureOn or Off...................................... 136

Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts Onor Off............................................137

Setting the Tone Alert VolumeOffset Level..................................137

Turning the Talk Permit Tone Onor Off............................................138

Turning the Power Up Alert ToneOn or Off...................................... 138

Contents

5

English

Page 8: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Setting the Text Message AlertTone.............................................139

Changing the Display Mode..............139Adjusting the Display Brightness...... 140Language..........................................141Turning the LED Indicator On or Off. 142Turning the Introduction Screen On

or Off............................................142Voice Announcement........................143Call Forwarding ............................ 144Menu Timer.......................................144Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-A)..........145Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)...........145Intelligent Audio................................ 146Turning the Acoustic Feedback

Suppressor Feature On or Off . 147Turning the Microphone Dynamic

Distortion Control Feature On orOff................................................ 148

Global Positioning System (GPS).....149Text Entry Configuration................... 149Flexible Receive List.........................155Accessing General Radio

Information...................................158Front Panel Programming (FPP)...... 161RSSI Values......................................162

Connect Plus Operations............163

Additional Radio Controls inConnect Plus Mode..................164

Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button..........................164Programmable Buttons................................164

Assignable Radio Functions............. 165Assignable Settings or Utility

Functions..................................... 166Identifying Status Indicators in Connect

Plus Mode...............................................166Display Icons.....................................166Call Icons.......................................... 168Advanced Menu Icons...................... 169Sent Item Icons ................................169Bluetooth Device Icons..................... 169LED Indicator.................................... 170Indicator Tones................................. 171Audio Tones......................................171

Switching Between Connect Plus andNon-Connect Plus Modes.......................171C

onte

nts

6

English

Page 9: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Making and Receiving Calls inConnect Plus Mode..................172

Selecting a Site............................................172Roam Request..................................172Site Lock On/Off................................172Site Restriction..................................172

Selecting a Zone..........................................173Using Multiple Networks.............................. 173Selecting a Call Type...................................174Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call. 174

Receiving and Responding to aGroup Call....................................175

Receiving and Responding to aPrivate Call.................................. 175

Receiving a Site All Call....................176Making a Radio Call.....................................176

Making a Call with the ChannelSelector Knob.............................. 177

Making a Private Call with a OneTouch Call Button........................ 179

Making a Call with theProgrammable Manual DialButton.......................................... 179

Advanced Features in ConnectPlus Mode................................. 181

Auto Fallback...............................................181Indications of Auto Fallback Mode....181Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback

Mode............................................181Returning to Normal Operation.........182

Radio Check................................................ 182Sending a Radio Check.................... 182

Remote Monitor........................................... 183Initiating Remote Monitor..................184

Scan.............................................................185Starting and Stopping Scan.............. 185Responding to a Transmission

During a Scan.............................. 185User Configurable Scan...............................186

Turning Scan On or Off.....................186Editing the Scan List......................... 187Add or Delete a Group via the Add

Members Menu............................188Understanding Scan Operation.........190

Contacts Settings.........................................190Making a Private Call from Contacts.191Making a Call Alias Search...............192

Contents

7

English

Page 10: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Adding a New Contact...................... 192Call Indicator Settings..................................193

Activating and Deactivating CallRingers for Call Alert ...................193

Activating and Deactivating CallRingers for Private Calls.............. 194

Activating and Deactivating CallRingers for Text Message............194

Escalating Alarm Tone Volume.........195Call Log Features........................................ 195

Viewing Recent Calls........................196Deleting a Call from a Call List..........196Viewing Details from a Call List........ 197

Call Alert Operation..................................... 197Receiving and Responding to a

Call Alert...................................... 197Making a Call Alert from the

Contact List..................................198Making a Call Alert with the One

Touch Access Button...................198Emergency Operation..................................199

Receiving an Incoming Emergency.. 200Saving the Emergency Details to

the Alarm List...............................201Deleting the Emergency Details........201Responding to an Emergency Call... 201Responding to an Emergency Alert.. 202

Initiating an Emergency Call............. 202Initiating an Emergency Call with

Voice to Follow............................ 203Initiating an Emergency Alert............203Exiting Emergency Mode..................204

Man Down Alarms....................................... 204Turning Man Down Alarms On and

Off................................................ 206Resetting the Man Down Alarms...... 207

Beacon Feature........................................... 207Turning Beacon On and Off..............208Resetting the Beacon........................209

Text Message Features...............................210Writing and Sending a Text

Message...................................... 210Sending a Quick Text Message........211Sending a Quick Text Message

with the One Touch AccessButton.......................................... 212

Accessing the Drafts Folder..............212Managing Fail-to-Send Text

Messages.................................... 214Managing Sent Text Messages........ 216Receiving a Text Message................219Reading a Text Message..................220Managing Received Text Messages.220

Privacy.........................................................223

Con

tent

s

8

English

Page 11: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Making a Privacy-Enabled(Scrambled) Call.......................... 224

Security........................................................225Radio Disable....................................225Radio Enable.................................... 226

Password Lock Features............................. 227Accessing the Radio from

Password..................................... 228Unlocking the Radio from Locked

State............................................ 228Turning the Password Lock On or

Off................................................ 229Changing the Password....................229

Bluetooth Operation.....................................230Turning Bluetooth On and Off...........231Finding and Connecting to a

Bluetooth Device..........................231Finding and Connecting from a

Bluetooth Device (DiscoverableMode)...........................................232

Disconnecting from a BluetoothDevice..........................................233

Switching Audio Route......................233Viewing Device Details..................... 233Editing Device Name........................ 234Deleting Device Name...................... 234Bluetooth Mic Gain............................235

Notification List............................................ 235Accessing the Notification List.......... 235

Utilities......................................................... 236Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On

or Off............................................236Turning Keypad Tones On or Off......236Setting the Tone Alert Volume

Offset Level..................................236Turning the Talk Permit Tone On

or Off............................................237Turning the Power Up Alert Tone

On or Off...................................... 238Setting the Power Level....................238Changing the Display Mode..............239Adjusting the Display Brightness...... 240Turning the Introduction Screen On

or Off............................................240Locking and Unlocking the Keypad.. 241Language..........................................242Turning the LED Indicator On or Off. 242Identifying Cable Type...................... 243Voice Announcement........................243Menu Timer.......................................244Setting the Squelch Level................. 244Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)...........245Intelligent Audio................................ 245

Contents

9

English

Page 12: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Turning the Acoustic FeedbackSuppressor Feature On or Off . 247

Turning the Microphone DynamicDistortion Control Feature On orOff................................................ 248

Global Positioning System (GPS).....248Text Entry Configuration................... 249Accessing General Radio

Information...................................254

Accessories..................................266Antennas......................................................266Batteries.......................................................266Carry Devices.............................................. 267Chargers......................................................267Earbuds and Earpieces............................... 268Headsets and Headset Accessories............269Remote Speaker Microphones.................... 270Surveillance Accessories.............................270Miscellaneous Accessories..........................271

Batteries and Chargers Warranty......... 273The Workmanship Warranty........................273The Capacity Warranty................................273

Limited Warranty....................................274

MOTOROLA COMMUNICATIONPRODUCTS........................................... 274

I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERSAND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 274

II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 275III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................275IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.275V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT

COVER:..................................................276VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE

PROVISIONS:........................................ 276VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................278

Con

tent

s

10

English

Page 13: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Declaration of ConformityThis declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below.

Declaration of Conformity

Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a)

Responsible Party

Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc.

Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A.

Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744

Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: DGP 5550/DGP 8550

conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a)

Declaration of C

onformity

11

English

Page 14: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Class B Digital Device

As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if notinstalled and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined byturning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of thefollowing measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Dec

lara

tion

of C

onfo

rmity

12

English

Page 15: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Important Safety InformationRF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guidefor Portable Two-Way Radios

ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only.Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposureand Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-WayRadios which contains important operatinginstructions for safe usage and RF energy awarenessand control for Compliance with applicable standardsand Regulations.

For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries,and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com

Important S

afety Information

13

English

Page 16: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Software VersionAll the features described in the following sections aresupported by the radio's software version R02.30.01or later.

See Checking the Firmware Version and CodeplugVersion on page 159 to determine your radio'ssoftware version.

Check with your dealer or system administrator formore details of all the features supported.

Sof

twar

e V

ersi

on

14

English

Page 17: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Computer Software CopyrightsThe Motorola products described in this manual mayinclude copyrighted Motorola computer programsstored in semiconductor memories or other media.Laws in the United States and other countriespreserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights forcopyrighted computer programs including, but notlimited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce inany form the copyrighted computer program.Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computerprograms contained in the Motorola productsdescribed in this manual may not be copied,reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, ordistributed in any manner without the express writtenpermission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase ofMotorola products shall not be deemed to grant eitherdirectly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, anylicense under the copyrights, patents or patentapplications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation oflaw in the sale of a product.

The AMBE+2™ voice coding Technology embodied inthis product is protected by intellectual property rights

including patent rights, copyrights and trade secretsof Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

This voice coding Technology is licensed solely foruse within this Communications Equipment. The userof this Technology is explicitly prohibited fromattempting to decompile, reverse engineer, ordisassemble the Object Code, or in any other wayconvert the Object Code into a human-readable form.

U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,#5,226,084 and #5,195,166.

Com

puter Softw

are Copyrights

15

English

Page 18: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Handling PrecautionsThe MOTOTRBO Series Digital Portable radio meetsIP57 specifications, allowing the radio to withstandadverse field conditions such as being submersed inwater.

• If the radio has been submersed in water, shakethe radio well to remove any water that may betrapped inside the speaker grille and microphoneport. Trapped water could cause decreased audioperformance.

• If the radio’s battery contact area has beenexposed to water, clean and dry battery contactson both the radio and the battery before attachingthe battery to the radio. The residual water couldshort-circuit the radio.

• If the radio has been submersed in a corrosivesubstance (e.g. saltwater), rinse the radio andbattery in fresh water then dry the radio andbattery.

• To clean the exterior surfaces of the radio, use adiluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent andfresh water (i.e. one teaspoon of detergent to onegallon of water).

• Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radiochassis below the battery contact. This vent allowsfor pressure equalization in the radio. Doing somay create a leak path into the radio and theradio’s submersibility may be lost.

• Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with alabel.

• Ensure that no oily substances come in contactwith the vent.

• The radio with antenna attached properly isdesigned to be submersible to a maximum depthof 1 meter (3.28 feet) and a maximum submersiontime of 30 minutes. Exceeding either maximumlimit or use without antenna may result in damageto the radio.

• When cleaning the radio, do not use a highpressure jet spray on the radio as this will exceedthe 1 meter depth pressure and may cause waterto leak into the radio.

Caution: Do not disassemble the radio. Thiscould damage radio seals and result in leakpaths into the radio. Radio maintenanceshould only be done in service depot that isequipped to test and replace the seal on theradio.

Han

dlin

g P

reca

utio

ns

16

English

Page 19: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Getting Started

How to Use This GuideThis User Guide covers the basic operation of theMOTOTRBO Portables.

However, your dealer or system administrator mayhave customized your radio for your specific needs.Check with your dealer or system administrator formore information.

Throughout this publication, the icons described nextare used to indicate features supported in either theconventional Analog mode or conventional Digitalmode:

Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-Only feature.

Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-Only feature.

For features that are available in both conventionalAnalog and Digital modes, no icon is shown.

Conventional Analog Mode-Only features are notavailable in Connect Plus mode of operation. See Connect Plus Operations on page 163 for moreinformation.

For features that are available in a conventional multi-site mode, see IP Site Connect on page 40 for moreinformation.

Selected features are also available on the single-sitetrunking mode, Capacity Plus. See Capacity Plus onpage 40 for more information.

Selected features are also available in the multi-sitetrunking mode, Linked Capacity Plus. See LinkedCapacity Plus on page 41 for more information.

What Your Dealer/System Administrator CanTell You

You can consult your dealer or system administratorabout the following:

• Is your radio programmed with any presetconventional channels?

• Which buttons have been programmed to accessother features?

• What optional accessories may suit your needs?

Getting S

tarted

17

English

Page 20: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• What are the best radio usage practices foreffective communication?

• What maintenance procedures will help promotelonger radio life?

Get

ting

Sta

rted

18

English

Page 21: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Preparing Your Radio for Use

Charging the Battery

For best performance, your radio is powered by aMotorola-approved Nickel Metal-Hydride (NiMH) orLithium-Ion (Li-lon) battery. To avoid damage andcomply with warranty terms, charge the battery usinga Motorola charger exactly as described in thecharger user guide. It is recommended your radioremains powered off while charging.

Charge a new battery 14 to 16 hours before initial usefor best performance.

Attaching the Battery

1 Align the battery with the rails on the back of theradio. Press the battery firmly, and slide upwardsuntil the latch snaps into place. Slide battery latchinto lock position.

2 To remove the battery, turn the radio off. Move thebattery latch ( ) into unlock position and hold, andslide the battery down and off the rails.

A

Preparing Y

our Radio for U

se

19

English

Page 22: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Attaching the AntennaCaution: If antenna needs to be replaced,ensure that only MOTOTRBO antennas areused. Neglecting this will damage your radio.See Antennas on page 266 for a list ofavailable antennas.

1 With the radio turned off, set the antenna in itsreceptacle and turn clockwise.

2 To remove the antenna, turn the antennacounterclockwise.

Attaching the Belt Clip

1 Align the grooves on the clip with those on thebattery and press downward until you hear a click.

2 To remove the clip, press the belt clip tab awayfrom the battery using a key. Then slide the clipupward and away from the radio.

Pre

parin

g Y

our R

adio

for U

se

20

English

Page 23: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Attaching the Universal Connector Cover(Dust Cover)

The universal connector ( ) is located on theantenna side of the radio. It is used to connectMOTOTRBO accessories to the radio.

A

Insert the hooked end of the cover into the slotsabove the universal connector. Press downward onthe cover to seat the lower tab properly into the RFconnector.

Turn the thumbscrew clockwise to secure theconnector cover to the radio.

To remove the universal connector cover, press downon the cover and turn the thumbscrewcounterclockwise.

Replace the dust cover when the universal connectoris not in use.

Powering Up the RadioRotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwiseuntil you hear a click. You see MOTOTRBO (TM) on theradio’s display momentarily, followed by a welcomemessage or welcome image.

The LED lights up solid green( ) if the backlightsetting is set to turn on automatically.

Preparing Y

our Radio for U

se

21

English

Page 24: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

A

Note: The Home screen does not light up during apower up if the LED indicator is disabled (see Turningthe LED Indicator On or Off on page 142).

A brief tone sounds, indicating that the power up testis successful.

Note: There is no power up tone if the radio tones/alerts function is disabled (see Turning the RadioTones/Alerts On or Off on page 137).

If your radio does not power up, check your battery.Make sure that it is charged and properly attached. Ifyour radio still does not power up, contact yourdealer.

To turn off the radio, rotate this knobcounterclockwise until you hear a click. You see abrief Powering Down on the radio’s display.

Adjusting the VolumeTo increase the volume, turn the On/Off/VolumeControl Knob clockwise.

To decrease the volume, turn this knobcounterclockwise.

Note: Your radio can be programmed to have aminimum volume offset where the volume levelcannot be lowered past the programmed minimumvolume. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

Pre

parin

g Y

our R

adio

for U

se

22

English

Page 25: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Identifying Radio Controls

Radio Controls

1

23

4

56789

19

10

1817

1615141312

11

1 Channel Selector Knob2 On/Off/Volume Control Knob3 LED Indicator4 Side Button 1[1]

5 Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button6 Side Button 2[1]

7 Side Button 3[1]

8 Front Button P1[1]

9 Menu/OK Button10 4–Way Navigation Button11 Keypad12 Back/Home Button13 Front Button P2[1]

14 Display15 Microphone16 Speaker17 Universal Connector for Accessories18 Emergency Button[1]

19 Antenna

1 These buttons are programmable.

Identifying Radio C

ontrols

23

English

Page 26: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Using the 4–Way Navigation Button

You can use the 4–way navigation button, , toscroll through options, increase/decrease values, andnavigate vertically.

Category Direction

or or

Menu VerticalNavigation

-

Lists VerticalNavigation

-

View Details VerticalNavigation

Previous/NextItem

You can use the 4–way navigation button, , asa number, alias, or free form text editor.

EditorCategory

Direction

or or

Number - Left : Delete lastdigit

Right : -

Alias - -

Free Form Text Move cursor up/down

Move cursorone characterright/left

Numeric Values Increase/Decrease

Move cursorone characterright/left

Iden

tifyi

ng R

adio

Con

trols

24

English

Page 27: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Using the KeypadYou can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radio’s features. You can use the keypad to entersubscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The nexttable shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.

Key Number of Times Key is Pressed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 . , ? ! @ & ' % — : * #

A B C 2

D E F 3

G H I 4

J K L 5

M N O 6

P Q R S 7

T U V 8

Identifying Radio C

ontrols

25

English

Page 28: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Key Number of Times Key is Pressed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

W X Y 9

0 Note: Press to enter “0” and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn offthe CAPS lock.

* ordel

Note: Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a “*”.

# orspace

Note: Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a “#”. Longpress to change text entry method.

Iden

tifyi

ng R

adio

Con

trols

26

English

Page 29: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Non-Connect Plus Operations

Non-C

onnect Plus O

perations

27

English

Page 30: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

Push-To-Talk (PTT) ButtonThe PTT button on the side of the radio ( ) servestwo basic purposes:

A

• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allowsthe radio to transmit to other radios in the call.

Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Releasethe PTT button to listen.

The microphone is activated when the PTT buttonis pressed.

• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button isused to make a new call (see Making a Radio Callon page 48).

If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk PermitTone On or Off on page 138) or the PTT Sidetone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends beforetalking.

During a call, if the Channel Free Indication featureis enabled on your radio (programmed by yourdealer), you will hear a short alert tone the momentthe target radio (the radio that is receiving your call)releases the PTT button, indicating the channel isfree for you to respond.

You will also hear a continuous talk prohibit tone, ifyour call is interrupted, indicating that you shouldrelease the PTT button, for example when the radioreceives an Emergency Call.

Programmable ButtonsYour dealer can program the programmable buttonsas shortcuts to radio functions depending on theduration of a button press:

• Short press – Pressing and releasing rapidly.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

28

English

Page 31: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Long press – Pressing and holding for theprogrammed duration.

• Hold down – Keeping the button pressed.

Note: The programmed duration of a button press isapplicable for all assignable radio/utility functions orsettings. See Emergency Operation on page 90 formore information on the programmed duration of theEmergency button.

Assignable Radio Functions

Bluetooth® Audio Switch — Toggles audio routingbetween internal radio speaker and externalBluetooth-enabled accessory.

Contacts — Provides direct access to the Contactslist.

Call Alert — Provides direct access to the contactslist for you to select a contact to whom a Call Alertcan be sent.

Call Forwarding — Toggles Call Forwarding on oroff.

Call Log — Selects the call log list.

Voice Announcement for Channel — Plays zoneand channel announcement voice messages for the

current channel. This function is unavailable whenVoice Announcement is disabled.

Emergency — Depending on the programming,initiates or cancels an emergency.

Intelligent Audio — Toggles intelligent audio on oroff.

Manual Dial — Depending on the programming,initiates a Private or Phone Call by keying in anysubscriber ID or phone number.

Manual Site Roam[2] — Starts the manual sitesearch.

Mic AGC On/Off — Toggles the internal microphoneautomatic gain control (AGC) on or off.

Monitor — Monitors a selected channel for activity.

Notifications — Provides direct access to theNotifications list.

Nuisance Channel Delete[2] — Temporarily removesan unwanted channel, except for the SelectedChannel, from the scan list. The Selected Channelrefers to the user’s selected zone/channelcombination from which scan is initiated.

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

29

English

Page 32: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

One Touch Access — Directly initiates apredefined Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alertor a Quick Text message.

Option Board Feature — Toggles option boardfeature(s) on or off for option board-enabledchannels.

Permanent Monitor [2] — Monitors a selectedchannel for all radio traffic until function is disabled.

Phone — Provides direct access to the PhoneContacts list

Privacy — Toggles privacy on or off.

Radio Alias and ID — Provides radio alias and ID.

Radio Check — Determines if a radio is active in asystem.

Radio Enable — Allows a target radio to be remotelyenabled.

Radio Disable — Allows a target radio to be remotelydisabled.

Remote Monitor — Turns on the microphone of atarget radio without it giving any indicators.

Repeater/Talkaround[2] — Toggles between using arepeater and communicating directly with anotherradio.

Scan[2] — Toggles scan on or off.

Site Info — Displays current Linked Capacity Plussite name and ID. Plays site announcement voicemessages for the current site (this function isunavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled).

Site Lock On/Off[2] — When toggled on, the radiosearches the current site only. When toggled off, theradio searches other sites in addition to the currentsite.

Status — Selects the status list menu.

Telemetry Control — Controls the Output Pin ona local or remote radio.

Text Message — Selects the text message menu.

Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey — Stops thetransmission of a remote monitored radio withoutgiving any indicators, or an ongoing interruptible callto free the channel.

Voice Announcement On/Off — Toggles voiceannouncement on or off.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

30

English

Page 33: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) — TogglesVOX on or off.

Zone — Allows selection from a list of zones.

Assignable Settings or Utility Functions

All Tones/Alerts — Toggles all tones and alerts onor off.

Backlight — Toggles display backlight on or off.

Backlight Brightness — Adjusts the brightnesslevel.

Display Mode — Toggles the day/night display modeon or off.

Keypad Lock — Toggles keypad between lockedand unlocked.

Power Level — Toggles transmit power levelbetween high and low.

Accessing the Programmed FunctionsYou can access various radio functions through oneof the following ways:

• A short or long press of the relevantprogrammable buttons.

• Use the Menu Navigation Buttons as the stepsdescribe next.

1Press to access the menu. Press theappropriate Menu Scroll button ( or ) toaccess the menu functions.

2 To select a function or enter a sub-menu, press

the button.

3 To go back one menu level, or to return to the

previous screen, press the button. Long

2 Not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

31

English

Page 34: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

press the button to return to the Homescreen.

Note: Your radio automatically exits the menuafter a period of inactivity and returns to yourHome screen.

Identifying Status Indicators

Display Icons

The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries,and menu entries.

The following are icons that appear on the radio’sdisplay. Icons are displayed on the status bar,arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage andare channel specific.

Received Signal Strength Indicator(RSSI)

The number of bars displayedrepresents the radio signal strength.Four bars indicate the strongest signal.

This icon is only displayed whilereceiving.

Monitor

Selected channel is being monitored.

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth feature is enabled butthere is no remote Bluetooth deviceconnected.

Bluetooth Connected

The Bluetooth feature is enabled. Theicon stays lit when a remote Bluetoothdevice is connected.

High Volume Data

Radio is receiving high volume data andchannel is busy.

Job Ticket Notification

Notification List has items to review.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

32

English

Page 35: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

or Power Level

Radio is set at Low power or Radio isset at High power.

Tones Disable

Tones are turned off.

Option Board

The Option Board is enabled.

Option Board Non-Function

The Option Board is disabled.

Over-the-Air Programming DelayTimer

Indicates time left before automaticrestart of radio.

GPS Available

The GPS feature is enabled. The iconstays lit when a position fix is available.

GPS Not Available/Out of Range

The GPS feature is enabled but is notreceiving data from the satellite.

Scan[3][4]

Scan feature is enabled.

Scan- Priority 1[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/groupdesignated as Priority 1.

Scan- Priority 2[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/groupdesignated as Priority 2.

Vote Scan

Vote scan feature is enabled.

Flexible Receive List

Flexible receive list is enabled.

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

33

English

Page 36: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Emergency

Radio is in Emergency mode.

Secure

The Privacy feature is enabled.

Unsecure

The Privacy feature is disabled.

Site Roaming[3]

The site roaming feature is enabled.

Talkaround[3][4]

In the absence of a repeater, radio iscurrently configured for direct radio toradio communication.

Battery

The number of bars (0 – 4) shownindicates the charge remaining in thebattery. Blinks when the battery is low.

Call Icons

The following icons appear on the radio’s displayduring a call. These icons also appear in the Contactslist to indicate ID type.

Private Call

Indicates a Private Call in progress. Inthe Contacts list, it indicates asubscriber alias (name) or ID(number).

Group Call/All Call

3 Not applicable in Capacity Plus4 Not applicable in Linked Capacity Plus

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

34

English

Page 37: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Indicates a Group Call or All Call inprogress. In the Contacts list, itindicates a group alias (name) or ID(number).

Phone Call as Private Call

Indicates a Phone Call as Private Callin progress. In the Contacts list, itindicates a phone alias (name) or ID(number).

Phone Call as Group/All Call

Indicates a Phone Call as Group/AllCall in progress. In the Contacts list, itindicates a group alias (name) or ID(number).

Bluetooth PC Call

Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call inprogress. In the Contacts list, itindicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias(name) or ID (number).

Advanced Menu Icons

The following icons appear beside menu items thatoffer a choice between two options or as an indicationthat there is a sub-menu offering two options.

Checkbox (Empty)

Indicates the option is not selected.

Checkbox (Checked)

Indicates the option is selected.

Solid Black Box

Indicates the option selected for the menuitem with a sub-menu.

Mini Notice Icons

The following icons appear momentarily on theradio’s display after an action to perform task istaken.

Successful Transmission(Positive)

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

35

English

Page 38: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Successful action taken.

Failed Transmission (Negative)

Failed action taken.

Transmission in Progress(Transitional)

Transmitting. This is seen beforeindication for SuccessfulTransmission or Failed Transmission.

Sent Item Icons

The following icons appear at the top right corner ofthe radio’s display in the Sent Items folder.

OR

Sent Successfully

The text message is sent successfully.

OR

Send Failed

The text message has not been sent.

OR

In-Progress

• The text message to a group alias or IDis pending transmission.

• The text message to a subscriber aliasor ID is pending transmission, followedby waiting for acknowledgement.

Bluetooth Device Icons

The following icons also appear next to items in thelist of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicatethe device type.

Bluetooth Data Device

Bluetooth-enabled data device, suchas a scanner.A

dditi

onal

Rad

io C

ontro

ls in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

36

English

Page 39: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Bluetooth Audio Device

Bluetooth-enabled audio device,such as a headset.

Bluetooth PTT Device

Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, suchas a PTT-Only Device (POD).

Job Tickets Icons

All Jobs

Indicates all jobs listed.

New Jobs

Indicates new jobs.

LED Indicator

The LED indicator ( ) shows the operational status ofyour radio.

A

Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low batterycondition, receiving an emergencytransmission or has failed the self-test upon powering up, or hasmoved out of range if radio isconfigured with Auto-RangeTransponder System.

Solid yellow Radio is monitoring a conventionalchannel or in Bluetooth DiscoverableMode.

Blinkingyellow

Radio is scanning for activity orreceiving a Call Alert, flexible receive

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

37

English

Page 40: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

list is enabled or all local LinkedCapacity Plus channels are busy.

Doubleblinkingyellow

Radio is no longer connected to therepeater while in Capacity Plus orLinked Capacity Plus; all CapacityPlus or Linked Capacity Pluschannels are currently busy. AutoRoaming is enabled, radio is activelysearching for a new site. Alsoindicates that radio has yet torespond to a group call alert, or radiois locked.

Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting.

Blinkinggreen

Radio is powering up, receiving anon-privacy- enabled call or data, ordetecting activity, or retrieving Over-the-Air Programming transmissionsover the air.

Doubleblinkinggreen

Radio is receiving a privacy-enabledcall or data.

Note:

While in conventional mode, when the LED blinksgreen, it indicates the radio detects activity over theair. Due to the nature of the digital protocol, thisactivity may or may not affect the radio's programmedchannel.

For Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus, there isno LED indication when the radio is detecting activityover the air.

Audio Tones

Audio tones provide you with audible indications ofthe radio’s status or the radio’s response to datareceived.

Continuous Tone A monotone sound.Sounds continuouslyuntil termination.

Periodic Tone Sounds periodicallydepending on theduration set by the radio.Tone starts, stops, andrepeats itself.

Repetitive Tone A single tone thatrepeats itself until it isterminated by the user.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

38

English

Page 41: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Momentary Tone Sounds only once for ashort period of timedefined by the radio.

Indicator Tones

High pitched tone Low pitched tone

Positive Indicator Tone

Negative Indicator Tone

Switching Between Conventional Analog andDigital Mode

Each channel in your radio can be configured as aconventional analog or conventional digital channel.Use the Channel Selector Knob ( ) to switchbetween an analog or a digital channel.

A

When switching from digital to analog mode, certainfeatures are unavailable. Icons for the digital features(such as Messages) reflect this change by appearing‘grayed out’. Disabled features are hidden in themenu.

Your radio also has features available in both analogand digital mode. However, the minor differences inthe way each feature works does NOT affect theperformance of your radio.

Note:

Your radio also switches between digital and analogmodes during a dual mode scan (see Scan on page72).

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

39

English

Page 42: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

IP Site Connect This feature allows your radio to extend conventionalcommunication beyond the reach of a single site, byconnecting to different available sites which areconnected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network.

When the radio moves out of range from one site andinto the range of another, it connects to the new site'srepeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions.Depending on your settings, this is doneautomatically or manually.

If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scansthrough all available sites when the signal from thecurrent site is weak or when the radio is unable todetect any signal from the current site. It then lockson to the repeater with the strongest Received SignalStrength Indicator (RSSI) value.

In a manual site search, the radio searches for thenext site in the roam list that is currently in range (butwhich may not have the strongest signal) and lockson to it.

Note: Each channel can only have either Scan orRoam enabled, not both at the same time.

Channels with this feature enabled can be added to aparticular roam list. The radio searches the channel(s)in the roam list during the automatic roam operationto locate the best site.

A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels(including the Selected Channel).

Note: You cannot manually add or delete an entry tothe roam list. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

Capacity Plus Capacity Plus is a single-site trunking configuration ofthe MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool ofchannels to support hundreds of users and up to 254Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficientlyutilize the available number of programmed channelswhile in Repeater Mode.

You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to accessa feature not applicable to Capacity Plus via aprogrammable button press.

Your radio also has features that are available inconventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, CapacityPlus and Linked Capacity Plus. However, the minor

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

40

English

Page 43: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

differences in the way each feature works does NOTaffect the performance of your radio.

Check with your dealer or system administrator formore information on this configuration.

Linked Capacity Plus Linked Capacity Plus is a multi-site multi-channeltrunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radiosystem, combining the best of both Capacity Plus andIP Site Connect configurations.

Linked Capacity Plus allows your radio to extendtrunking communication beyond the reach of a singlesite, by connecting to different available sites whichare connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. Italso provides an increase in capacity by efficientlyutilizing the combined available number ofprogrammed channels supported by each of theavailable sites.

When the radio moves out of range from one site andinto the range of another, it connects to the new site'srepeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions.Depending on your settings, this is doneautomatically or manually.

If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scansthrough all available sites when the signal from thecurrent site is weak or when the radio is unable todetect any signal from the current site. It then lockson to the repeater with the strongest Received SignalStrength Indicator (RSSI) value.

In a manual site search, the radio searches for thenext site in the roam list that is currently in range (butwhich may not have the strongest signal) and lockson to it.

Any channel with Linked Capacity Plus enabled canbe added to a particular roam list. The radio searchesthese channels during the automatic roam operationto locate the best site.

Note: You cannot manually add or delete an entry tothe roam list. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

Similar to Capacity Plus, icons of features notapplicable to Linked Capacity Plus are not availablein the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if youtry to access a feature not applicable to LinkedCapacity Plus via a programmable button press.

Check with your dealer or system administrator formore information on this configuration.

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

41

English

Page 44: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

Selecting a ZoneA zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports upto 1000 channels and 250 zones, with a maximum of160 channels per zone.

1 Access the Zone feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedZone button

Press the programmed Zonebutton.

Radio menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Zone and

press to select.

The current zone is displayed and indicated by a.

2 Select the required zone.

RadioControl

Steps

or or and scroll to the requiredzone.

Keypad 1 Enter the first character of therequired zone.

2 A blinking cursor appears allowingyou to continue entering thesubsequent characters of therequired zone.

Note: Press to move one space to

the left. Press to move one space

to the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted

characters.Long press tochange the text entry method.

Note: The first line of the displayshows the characters you keyed in.The second line shows a zone thatmatches what you have alreadykeyed in. The alias search is case-

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

42

English

Page 45: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControl

Steps

insensitive. If there are two or morewith the same name, the radiodisplays the zone that is listed first inthe zone list.

3Press to select.The display shows <Zone> Selectedmomentarily and returns to the selected zonescreen.

Selecting a ChannelTransmissions are sent and received on a channel.Depending on your radio’s configuration, eachchannel may have been programmed differently tosupport different groups of users or supplied withdifferent features. After selecting the relevant Zone,select the relevant channel you require to transmit orreceive on.

• Turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob toselect the channel, subscriber alias or ID, or groupalias or ID.

Receiving and Responding to a Radio CallOnce the channel, subscriber ID or group ID isdisplayed, you can proceed to receive and respond tocalls.

The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green when the radio isreceiving.

Note: The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and double blinks green when the radiois receiving a privacy-enabled call .

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

43

English

Page 46: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radiomust have the same Privacy Key, OR the same KeyValue and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), asthe transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving thecall from).

See Privacy on page 115 for more information.

Receiving and Responding to a Group Call

To receive a call from a group of users, your radiomust be configured as part of that group.

When you receive a Group Call (while on the Homescreen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text lineshows the caller alias. The second text line displaysthe group call alias. Your radio unmutes and theincoming call sounds through the radio's speaker.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

• If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone themoment the transmitting radio releases thePTT button, indicating the channel is free foryou to respond. Press the PTT button torespond.

• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled,press the PTT button to stop the current callfrom the transmitting radio and free the channelfor you to talk/respond.

The LED lights up solid green.

2 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• the Talk Permit Tone• the PTT Sidetone

3 Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.

Note: See Making a Group Call on page 49 fordetails on making a Group Call.

Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

A Private Call is a call from an individual radio toanother individual radio.

When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinksgreen. The Private Call icon appears in the top rightcorner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Your

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

44

English

Page 47: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds throughthe radio's speaker.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

• If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone themoment the transmitting radio releases thePTT button, indicating the channel is free foryou to respond. Press the PTT button torespond.

• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled,press the PTT button to stop the current callfrom the transmitting radio and free the channelfor you to talk/respond.

The LED lights up solid green.

2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

3 Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.

See Making a Private Call on page 50 for details onmaking a Private Call.

Receiving an All Call

An All Call is a call from an individual radio to everyradio on the channel. It is used to make importantannouncements requiring the user’s full attention.

When you receive an All Call, a tone sounds and theLED blinks green.

The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.The first text line shows the caller alias. The secondtext line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes andthe incoming call sounds through the radio speaker.

Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to theprevious screen before receiving the call. An All Calldoes not wait for a predetermined period of timebefore ending.

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment thetransmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicatingthe channel is now available for use.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

45

English

Page 48: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

You cannot respond to an All Call.

Note: See Making an All Call on page 51 for detailson making an All Call.

Note: The radio stops receiving the All Call if youswitch to a different channel while receiving the call.During an All Call, you will not be able to use anyprogrammed button functions until the call ends.

Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call

A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio toanother individual radio. It is a Private Call on ananalog system.

When you receive a Selective Call, the LED blinksgreen. The Private Call icon appears in the top rightcorner. The first text line shows the caller alias orSelective Call or Alert with Call. Your radiounmutes and the incoming call sounds through theradio's speaker.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment

the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.The LED lights up solid green.

3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

4 Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.

See Making a Private Call on page 50 for details onmaking a Private Call.

Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call

Phone Call as Private Call

When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call, thePhone Call icon appears in the top right corner; thedisplay shows the caller alias or Phone Call.M

akin

g an

d R

ecei

ving

Cal

ls in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

46

English

Page 49: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio,the first line of the display shows Unavailable andyour radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to theprevious screen when the call ends.

1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

2Press to end the call.

The display shows Ending Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsCall Ended.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat this step or wait for thetelephone user to end the call.

Phone Call as Group Call

When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call, thePhone Group Call icon appears in the top rightcorner; the display shows the group alias and PhoneCall.

If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio,the display shows Unavailable and your radiomutes the call.

1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

2Press to end the call.

The display shows Ending Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsCall Ended.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat this step or wait for thetelephone user to end the call.

Phone Call as All Call

When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, thePhone Call icon appears in the top right corner; thedisplay shows All Call and Phone Call.

If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio,the first line of the display shows Unavailable andyour radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to theprevious screen when the call ends.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

47

English

Page 50: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Note: When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call,you can respond to the call or end the call, only if anAll Call type is assigned to the channel.

1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

2Press to end the call.The display shows Ending Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsAll Call and Call Ended.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat this step to end the call.

Making a Radio CallAfter selecting your channel, you can select asubscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

• The Channel Selector Knob.• A programmed One Touch Access button – The

One Touch Access feature allows you to make aGroup or Private Call to a predefined ID easily.This feature can be assigned to a short or longprogrammable button press. You can ONLY have

one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button.Your radio can have multiple One Touch Accessbuttons programmed.

• The programmed number keys – This method isfor Group, Private and All Calls only and is usedwith the keypad (see Making a Group, Private orAll Call with the Programmable Number Key onpage 54).

• A programmable button – This method is forPhone Calls only (see Making a Phone Call withthe Programmable Phone Button on page 55).

• The Contacts list (see Contact Settings on page75).

• Manual Dial – This method is for Private andPhone Calls only and is dialed using the keypad(see Making a Phone Call from Contacts on page77, Making a Private Call from Contacts on page76, and Making a Call with the ProgrammableManual Dial Button on page 57).M

akin

g an

d R

ecei

ving

Cal

ls in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

48

English

Page 51: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Note: Your radio must have the Privacy featureenabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabledtransmission. Only target radios with the samePrivacy Key OR the same Key Value and Key ID asyour radio will be able to unscramble thetransmission.

Note: See Privacy on page 115 for more information.

Making a Group Call

To make a call to a group of users, your radio mustbe configured as part of that group.

1 Do one of the following.

• Select the channel with the active group aliasor ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 43.

• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Group Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the group call alias.

4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• the Talk Permit Tone• the PTT Sidetone

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen. You see the Group Call icon, the groupalias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID onyour display.

6 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. Radio returns to thescreen you were on prior to initiating the call.

Note: You can also make a Group Call via Contacts(see Making a Group Call from Contacts on page76).

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

49

English

Page 52: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Making a Private Call

While you can receive and/or respond to a PrivateCall initiated by an authorized individual radio, yourradio must be programmed for you to initiate a PrivateCall.

There are two types of Private Calls. The first type,where a radio presence check is performed prior tosetting up the call, while the other sets up the callimmediately.

Only one of these call types can be programmed toyour radio by your dealer.

You will hear a negative indicator tone, when youmake a Private Call via the Contacts list, Call Log,One Touch Access button, the programmed numberkeys, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this feature isnot enabled.

Use the Text Message or Call Alert features tocontact an individual radio. See Text MessageFeatures on page 99 or Call Alert Operation onpage 89 for more information.

1 Do one of the following.

• Select the channel with the active subscriberalias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page43.

• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid greenThe Private Call iconappears on the top right corner. The first text lineshows the subscriber alias. The second text linedisplays the call status.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

6 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

50

English

Page 53: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.

Your radio may be programmed to perform a radiopresence check prior to setting up the Private Call. Ifthe target radio is not available, you hear a short toneand see negative mini notice on the display.You canalso make a Private Call via Contacts (see Making aPrivate Call from Contacts on page 76) or perform aquick alphanumeric search for the required alias via akeypad entry (see ).

Making an All Call

This feature allows you to transmit to all users on thechannel. Your radio must be programmed to allowyou to use this feature.

Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call.

1 Select the channel with the active All Call groupalias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 43.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green.The Group Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text lineshows All Call.

4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• the Talk Permit Tone• the PTT Sidetone

Making a Selective Call

Just like a Private Call, while you can receive and/orrespond to a Selective Call initiated by an authorizedindividual radio, your radio must be programmed foryou to initiate a Selective Call.

1 Select the channel with the active subscriber aliasor ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 43

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

51

English

Page 54: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• the Talk Permit Tone• the PTT Sidetone

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

The display shows Call Ended.

Making a Phone Call with the One Touch AccessButton

1 Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to make a Phone Call to the predefinedalias or ID.

If the entry for the One Touch Access button isempty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If theaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows Access Code:.

Enter the access code and press to proceed.

The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tonesounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephoneuser. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.The Phone Call icon remains in the top rightcorner.

If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone soundsand the display shows Phone Call Failed. Yourradio returns to the Access Code input screen. Ifthe access code was preconfigured in theContacts list, the radio returns to the screen youwere on prior to initiating the call.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

52

English

Page 55: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

3 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

To enter extra digits, if requested by the PhoneCall, enter the extra digits using the keypad and

press to proceed.

The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press,and the radio returns to the previous screen.

4Press to end the call.

If de-access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows De-AccessCode:. Do one of the following.

•Enter the de-access code and press toproceed. The radio returns to the previousscreen.

• Press the One Touch Access button. If theentry for the One Touch Access button isempty, a negative indicator tone sounds.

The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press,and the display shows Ending Phone Call.

If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone soundsand the display shows Call Ended.

If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radioreturns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 4on page 53 or wait for the telephone user to endthe call.

Note:

When the telephone user ends the call, a tonesounds and the display shows Call Ended.

If the call ends while you are entering the extradigits requested by the Phone Call, your radioreturns to the screen you were on prior to initiatingthe call.

During channel access, press to dismiss thecall attempt. A tone sounds to indicate success.

During the call, if you press the One TouchAccess button with the deaccess codepreconfigured or enter the deaccess code as theinput for extra digits, your radio attempts to endthe call.

The access or deaccess code cannot be morethan 10 characters.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

53

English

Page 56: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button

Note: Programmable buttons press must be initiatedfrom the Home screen.

The One Touch Call feature allows you to easilymake a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call aliasor ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or longprogrammable button press.

You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to aOne Touch Call button. Your radio can have multipleOne Touch Call buttons programmed.

1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button tomake a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Callalias or ID.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green.

The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment thetarget radio releases the PTT button, indicating thechannel is free for you to respond. Press the PTTbutton to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

Making a Group, Private or All Call with theProgrammable Number Key

The Programmable Number Key feature allows you tomake a Group, Private or All Call to a predefined aliasor ID easily. This feature can be assigned to all theavailable number keys on a keypad.

You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to anumber key, but you can have more than one numberkey associated to an alias or ID.

1 Long press the programmed number key, whenyou are on the Home screen, to make a Group,Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

54

English

Page 57: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If the number key is not associated to an entry, anegative indicator tone sounds.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Group/PrivateCall icon appears in the top right corner. The firsttext line shows the caller alias. The second textline displays either the call status for a Private Callor All Call for All Call.

4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• the Talk Permit Tone• the PTT Sidetone (Group Call only)

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

6 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. Radio returns to thescreen you were on prior to initiating the call.

For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when thecall ends.

See Assigning an Entry to a ProgrammableNumber Key on page 81 for details on assigningan entry to a number key on the keypad.

Making a Phone Call with the Programmable PhoneButton

1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter intothe Phone Entry list.

2 or to the required subscriber alias or ID,

and press to select.If the access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows Access Code:.

Enter the access code and press the buttonto proceed.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

55

English

Page 58: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tonesounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephoneuser. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.The Phone Call icon remains in the top rightcorner.

If call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds andthe display shows Phone Call Failed. Yourradio returns to the Access Code input screen. Ifthe access code was preconfigured in theContacts list, the radio returns to the screen youwere on prior to initiating the call.

3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

4 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

5 To enter extra digits, if requested by the PhoneCall, do one of the following.

• Press any keypad key to begin the input of theextra digits. The first line of the display showsExtra Digits:. The second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits

and press the button to proceed. TheDTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to theprevious screen.

• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMFtone sounds. If the entry for the One TouchAccess button is empty, a negative indicatortone sounds.

6Press to end the call.

If deaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code

and press the button to proceed. The radioreturns to the previous screen.

The DTMF tone sounds and the display showsEnding Phone Call.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

56

English

Page 59: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone soundsand the display shows Call Ended.

If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radioreturns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Steps 4on page 56 and 5 on page 56 or wait for thetelephone user to end the call.

When you press PTT button while in the PhoneContacts screen, a tone sounds and the displayshows Press OK to Place Phone Call.

When the telephone user ends the call, a tonesounds and the display shows Phone CallEnded.

If the call ends while you are entering the extradigits requested by the Phone Call, your radioreturns to the screen you were on prior to initiatingthe call.

Note: During channel access, press todismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.

Note: During the call, when you press One TouchAccess button with the deaccess codepreconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the

input for extra digits, your radio attempts to endthe call.

Note: The access or deaccess code cannot bemore than 10 characters.

Making a Call with the Programmable Manual DialButton

Making a Private Call

1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button toenter into the Manual Dial screen.

2 or to Radio Contact and press to

select.The display shows Number:.

3 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias.

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first text

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

57

English

Page 60: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

line shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

7 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment thetarget radio releases the PTT button, indicating thechannel is free for you to respond. Press the PTTbutton to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.

Making a Phone Call

1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button toenter into the Manual Dial screen.

2 or to Phone Contact and press to

select.

The display shows Number:.

3 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias .If the access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows Access Code:.

Enter the access code and press the buttonto proceed.

The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tonesounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephoneuser. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.The Phone Call icon remains in the top rightcorner.

If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone soundsand the display shows Phone Call Failed. Yourradio returns to the Access Code input screen. Ifthe access code was preconfigured in theContacts list, the radio returns to the screen youwere on prior to initiating the call.M

akin

g an

d R

ecei

ving

Cal

ls in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

58

English

Page 61: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

6 To enter extra digits, if requested by the PhoneCall, do one of the following.

• Press any keypad key to begin the input of theextra digits. Enter the extra digits and press the

button to proceed. The DTMF tonesounds and the radio returns to the previousscreen.

• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMFtone sounds. If the entry for the One TouchAccess button is empty, a negative indicatortone sounds.

7Press to end the call.

If deaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows De-AccessCode:. Enter the deaccess code and press the

button to proceed. The radio returns to theprevious screen.

The DTMF tone sounds and the display showsEnding Phone Call.

If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone soundsand the display shows Call Ended.

If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radioreturns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 7on page 59 or wait for the telephone user to endthe call.

When you press PTT button while in the PhoneContacts screen, a tone sounds and the displayshows Press OK to Place Phone Call.

When the telephone user ends the call, a tonesounds and the display shows Phone CallEnded.

If the call ends while you are entering the extradigits requested by the Phone Call, your radioreturns to the screen you were on prior to initiatingthe call.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

59

English

Page 62: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Note: During channel access, press todismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.

Note: During the call, when you press One TouchAccess button with the deaccess codepreconfigured or enter the deaccess code as theinput for extra digits, your radio attempts to endthe call.

Note: The access or deaccess code cannot bemore than 10 characters.

Stopping a Radio Call This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group orPrivate Call to free the channel for transmission. Forexample, when a radio experiences a “stuckmicrophone” condition where the PTT button isinadvertently pressed by the user.

Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.

1 Press the programmed Transmit InterruptRemote Dekey button, while on the relevantchannel.The display shows Remote Dekey.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows Remote Dekey Success, indicatingthat the channel is now free. The display showsCall Interrupted, and the radio sounds anegative indicator tone until the PTT button isreleased.

OR

The radio sounds a negative indicator tone andthe display shows Remote Dekey Failed.

TalkaroundYou can continue to communicate when yourrepeater is not operating, or when your radio is out ofthe repeater’s range but within talking range of otherradios.

This is called “talkaround”.

Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.

The Talkaround setting is retained even afterpowering down.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

60

English

Page 63: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

You can toggle between talkaround and repeatermodes by pressing the programmed Repeater/Talkaround button OR using the radio menu asdescribed next.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Talkaround and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5Press to enable/disable the Talkaround.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Monitoring Features

Monitoring a Channel

Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel isclear before transmitting.

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus andLinked Capacity Plus.

1 Press and hold the programmed Monitor buttonand listen for activity.

The Monitor icon appears on the display and theLED lights up solid yellow. You hear radio activityor total silence, depending on how your radio isprogrammed. This indicates that the channel is inuse.

The LED double blinks yellow when channel isbusy.

2 Wait until you hear “white noise”. This indicatesthat the channel is free.

3 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

61

English

Page 64: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Permanent Monitor

Use the Permanent Monitor feature to continuouslymonitor a selected channel for activity.

Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.

1 Press the programmed Permanent Monitorbutton to activate permanent monitoring of thechannel.Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED lights up solidyellow, and the display shows PermanentMonitor On. The Monitor icon appears on thedisplay.

2 Press the programmed Permanent Monitorbutton to exit Permanent Monitor mode.Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED turns off, andthe display shows Permanent Monitor Off.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

62

English

Page 65: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Advanced Features in Non-ConnectPlus Mode

Radio CheckIf enabled, this feature allows you to determine ifanother radio is active in a system without disturbingthe user of that radio. No audible or visual notificationis shown on the target radio.

This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliasesor IDs.

Sending a Radio Check

1 Access the Radio Check feature.RadioControl

Steps

ProgrammedRadio Checkbutton

1 Press the programmed RadioCheck button.

2 or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and

press to select.

RadioControl

Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu

2 or to Contacts and

press to select3 Use one of the steps

described next to select therequired subscriber alias orID

• select the subscriber aliasor ID directly

• or to therequired subscriberalias or ID and press

to select.• use the Manual Dial

menu

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

63

English

Page 66: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControl

Steps

• or to Manual

Dial and press toselect.

• or to Radio

Number and press to select.

• If there was previouslydialed ID, the IDappears along with ablinking cursor. Else,the first line of thedisplay shows RadioNumber:; the secondline of the displayshows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypadto edit/enter the ID,

RadioControl

Steps

and press toselect.

4 or to Radio Check

and press to select.

The display shows transitional mini notice,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up solid green.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If the button is pressed when the radio iswaiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds, andthe radio terminates all retries and exits RadioCheck mode.

If Radio Check is successful, a positive indicatortone sounds and the display shows positive mininotice.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

64

English

Page 67: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If Radio Check is unsuccessful, a negativeindicator tone sounds and the display showsnegative mini notice.

Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.

Remote MonitorUse the Remote Monitor feature to turn on themicrophone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDsonly). The green LED will blink once on the targetsubscriber. You can use this feature to monitor,remotely, any audible activity surrounding the targetradio.

Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.

Initiating Remote Monitor

1 Access the Remote Monitor feature.RadioControl

Steps

ProgrammedRemote

1 Press the programmed RemoteMonitor button.

RadioControl

Steps

MonitorButton

2 or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and press

to select.

Menu 1 to access the menu

2 or to Contacts and

press to select3 Use one of the steps described

next to select the requiredsubscriber alias or ID

• select the subscriber alias orID directly

• or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and

press to select.• use the Manual Dial menu

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

65

English

Page 68: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControl

Steps

• or to Manual

Dial and press toselect.

• or to Radio

Number and press toselect.

• If there was previouslydialed ID, the ID appearsalong with a blinkingcursor. Else, the first lineof the display showsRadio Number:; thesecond line of the displayshows a blinking cursor.Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID, and press

to select.

RadioControl

Steps

4 or to Remote Mon. and

press to select.

The display shows transitional mini notice,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up solid green.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display shows positive mini notice. Your radiostarts playing audio from the monitored radio for aprogrammed duration and display shows Rem.Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio soundsan alert tone and the LED turns off.

If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone the display shows negative mininotice.

Stopping Remote Monitor

Remote Monitor automatically stops after aprogrammed duration or when there is any user

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

66

English

Page 69: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

operation on the target radio. Follow the steps belowto manually stop Remote Monitor.

1 Press the programmed Transmit InterruptRemote Dekey button.

The display shows transitional mini notice,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up solid green.

2 Wait for acknowledgment.

If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicatortone and the display shows positive mini notice.

If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone and the display shows negative mininotice.

Scan ListsScan lists are created and assigned to individualchannels/ groups. Your radio scans for voice activityby cycling through the channel/group sequencespecified in the scan list for the current channel/group.

Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with amaximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan listsupports a mixture of both analog and digital entries.

You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editinga scan list.

You can attach a new scan list to your radio via FrontPanel Programming.

Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.

Viewing an Entry in the Scan List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Scan List and press to select.

4 Use or to view each member on the list.

The Priority icon appears left of the member’salias, if set, to indicate whether the member is ona Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannot

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

67

English

Page 70: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in ascan list.

There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None.

Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Scan List and press to select.

4 Key in the first character of the required alias.A blinking cursor appears.

5 Use the keypad to type the required alias.

Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press the keyto delete any unwanted characters. Long press

to change text entry method.

The first line of the display shows the charactersyou keyed in. The next lines of the display showthe shortlisted search results.

The alias search is case-insensitive. If there aretwo or more entries with the same name, the radiodisplays the entry that is listed first in the scan list.

Editing the Scan List

Adding a New Entry to the Scan List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Scan List and press to select.

4 or to Add Member and press to

select.

5 Select the required alias or ID byAdv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

68

English

Page 71: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControl

Steps

RadioNavigationButtons

or to the required alias orID.

Keypad Key in the first character of therequired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the

left. Press to move one space to

the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted characters.

Long press to change thetext entry method.

The first line of the display showsthe characters you keyed in. Thenext lines of the display show theshort listed search results. Thealias search is case-insensitive. Ifthere are two or more aliases with

RadioControl

Steps

the same name, the radio displaysthe alias that is listed first in thelist.

6Press to select.

7 or to the required priority level and press

to select.The display shows positive mini notice, followedimmediately by Add Another?.

8 Do one of the following:

• or to Yes and press to select, and

repeat Steps 5 on page 68 to 7 on page 69.•

or to No and press to save thecurrent list.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

69

English

Page 72: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Deleting an Entry from the Scan List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Scan List and press to select.

4 Select the required alias or ID byRadioControl

Steps

RadioNavigationButtons

or to the required alias orID.

Keypad Key in the first character of therequired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the

left. Press to move one space to

RadioControl

Steps

the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted characters.

Long press to change thetext entry method.

The first line of the display showsthe characters you keyed in. Thenext lines of the display show theshort listed search results. Thealias search is case-insensitive. Ifthere are two or more aliases withthe same name, the radio displaysthe alias that is listed first in thelist.

5Press to select.

6 or to Delete and press to select.

7 Do one of the following:

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

70

English

Page 73: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• At Delete Entry?, or to Yes and press

to delete entry. The display showspositive mini notice.

• or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

8 Repeat Steps 4 on page 70 to 7 on page 70 todelete other entries.After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long

press to return to the Home screen.

Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in theScan List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Scan List and press to select.

4 Select the required alias or ID by

RadioControl

Steps

RadioNavigationButtons

or to the required alias orID.

Keypad Key in the first character of therequired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the

left. Press to move one space to

the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted characters.

Long press to change thetext entry method.

The first line of the display showsthe characters you keyed in. Thenext lines of the display show theshort listed search results. Thealias search is case-insensitive. Ifthere are two or more aliases with

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

71

English

Page 74: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControl

Steps

the same name, the radio displaysthe alias that is listed first in thelist.

5Press to select.

6 or to Edit Priority and press to

select.

7 or to the required priority level and press

to select.The display shows positive mini notice beforereturning to the previous screen.

Note:

The Priority icon appears left of the member’sname.

There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None.

ScanWhen you start a scan, your radio cycles through theprogrammed scan list for the current channel lookingfor voice activity.

The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears onthe status bar.

During a dual mode scan, if you are on a digitalchannel, and your radio locks onto an analogchannel, it automatically switches from digital mode toanalog mode for the duration of the call. This is alsotrue for the reverse.

There are two ways of initiating scan:

• Main Channel Scan (Manual): Your radio scansall the channels/groups in your scan list. Onentering scan, your radio may – depending on thesettings – automatically start on the last scanned“active” channel/group or on the channel wherescan was initiated.

• Auto Scan (Automatic): Your radio automaticallystarts scanning when you select a channel/groupthat has Auto Scan enabled.

Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

72

English

Page 75: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Starting and Stopping Scan

While scanning, the radio will only accept data (e.g.text message, location, or PC data) if received on itsSelected Channel.

You can start and stop scanning by pressing theprogrammed Scan button OR follow the proceduredescribed next.

1 Use the Channel Selector Knob to select achannel programmed with a scan list.

2 to access the menu.

3 or to Scan and press to select.

4 or to Scan State and press to

select.

5 or to required scan state and press

to select.

• The display shows Scan On when Scan isenabled. The LED blinks yellow and the scanicon appears.

• The display shows Scan Off if Scan isdisabled. The LED turns off and the scan icondisappears.

Responding to a Transmission During a Scan

During scanning, your radio stops on a channel/groupwhere activity is detected. The radio stays on thatchannel for a programmed time period known as“hang time”.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

2 Press the PTT button during hang time.The LED lights up solid green.

3 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• the Talk Permit Tone

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

73

English

Page 76: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• the PTT Sidetone

4 Release the PTT button to listen.If you do not respond within the hang time, theradio returns to scanning other channels/groups.

Deleting a Nuisance Channel

If a channel continually generates unwanted calls ornoise (termed a “nuisance” channel), you cantemporarily remove the unwanted channel from thescan list.

This capability does not apply to the channeldesignated as the Selected Channel.

Deleting a “nuisance” channel is only possiblethrough the programmed Nuisance Channel Deletebutton. This feature is not accessible through themenu.

1 When your radio “locks on to” an unwanted ornuisance channel, press the programmedNuisance Channel Delete button until you hear atone.

2 Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button.The nuisance channel is deleted.

Restoring a Nuisance Channel

To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one ofthe following:

• Turn the radio off and then power it on again.• Stop and restart a scan via the programmed Scan

button or menu.• Change the channel via the Channel Selector

Knob.

Vote Scan Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage inareas where there are multiple base stationstransmitting identical information on different analogchannels.

Your radio scans analog channels of multiple basestations and performs a voting process to select thestrongest received signal. Once that is established,your radio unmutes to transmissions from that basestation.

The LED blinks yellow and the vote scan iconappears on the status bar.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

74

English

Page 77: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

To respond to a transmission during a Vote Scan,follow the same procedures as Responding to aTransmission During a Scan on page 73.

Contact SettingsContacts provides “address-book” capabilities on yourradio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID thatyou use to initiate a call.

Each entry, depending on context, associates withone of five types of calls: Group Call, Private Call, AllCall, PC Call or Dispatch Call.

PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They areonly available with the applications. Refer to the dataapplications documentation for more information.

Note:

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, youcan make privacy-enabled Group Call, Private Call,and All Call on that channel. Only target radios withthe same Privacy Key OR the same Key Value andKey ID as your radio will be able to unscramble thetransmission.

See Privacy on page 115 for more information.

Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assigneach entry to a programmable number key or moreon a keypad. If an entry is assigned to a number key,your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry.

Your radio supports two Contacts lists, one for Analogcontacts and one for Digital contacts, with a maximumof 500 members for each Contacts list.

Each entry within Contacts displays the followinginformation:

• Call Type• Call Alias• Call ID

Note:

You can add or edit subscriber IDs for the DigitalContacts list. Deleting subscriber IDs can only beperformed by your dealer.

For the Analog Contacts list, you can only view thesubscriber IDs, edit the subscriber IDs, and initiate aCall Alert. Adding and deleting capabilities can onlybe performed by your dealer.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

75

English

Page 78: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Making a Group Call from Contacts

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 or to the required group alias or ID.

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green.

6 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• the Talk Permit Tone• the PTT Sidetone

7 Release the PTT button to listen.When any user in the group responds, the LEDblinks green. You see the Group Call icon, thegroup ID, and the user’s ID on your display.

8 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

Making a Private Call from Contacts

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias or ID directly

• or to the required subscriber alias or

ID and press to select.• use the Manual Dial menu

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

76

English

Page 79: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• or to Manual Dial and press

to select.•

or to Radio Number and press to select.

• If there was previously dialed subscriberalias or ID, the alias or ID appears alongwith a blinking cursor. Else, the first line ofthe display shows Radio Number:; thesecond line of the display shows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID.

Press to select.

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.

6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

7 Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen and the display shows the transmittinguser's ID.

8 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

The display shows Call Ended.

Making a Phone Call from Contacts

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias or ID directly

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

77

English

Page 80: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• or to the required subscriber alias or

ID and press to select.• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial and press

to select.•

or to Phone Number and press to select.

• The first line of the display shows PhoneNumber: , the second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to

enter a telephone number, and press to select the entered number.

If the entry selected is empty, a negative indicatortone sounds and the display shows Phone CallInvalid # .

When you press PTT button while in the PhoneContacts screen, a negative indicator tone soundsand the display shows Press OK to PlacePhone Call.

4 or to Call Phone and press to

select.

5 If the access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the first line of the display showsAccess Code: . The second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code

and press to proceed.

During channel access, press to dismiss thecall attempt and a negative indicator tone sounds.Your radio returns to the Call Phone screen.

The access code cannot be more than 10characters.

The first line of the display shows Calling. Thesecond line of the display shows the subscriberalias or ID, and the Phone Call icon.

If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hearthe dialing tone of the telephone user. The first lineof the display shows the subscriber alias or ID,and the RSSI icon. The second line of the displayshows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

78

English

Page 81: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the displayshows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns tothe Access Code input screen. If the access codewas preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radioreturns to the screen you were on prior to initiatingthe call.

6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

7 Do one of the following:

• Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

Note:

The RSSI icon disappears during transmission.

To enter extra digits, if requested by the PhoneCall, press any keypad key to begin the input ofextra digits. The first line of the display showsExtra Digits: . The second line of thedisplay shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra

digits and press to proceed. The DTMFtone sounds and the radio returns to theprevious screen.

If the call ends while you are entering the extradigits requested by the Phone Call, your radioreturns to the screen you were on prior toinitiating the call.

• Press One Touch Access button.

Note:

The DTMF tone sounds.

If the entry for the One Touch Access buttonis empty, a negative indicator tone sounds.

During the call, when you press One TouchAccess button with the deaccess codepreconfigured or enter the deaccess code as theinput for extra digits, your radio attempts to endthe call.

During channel access and access/deaccess codeor extra digits transmission, your radio responds toOn/ Off/Volume Control Knob and ChannelSelector Knob only. A tone sounds for everyinvalid input.

8Press to end the call.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

79

English

Page 82: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

9 If deaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code

and press to proceed.The deaccess code cannot be more than 10characters.

The DTMF tone sounds and the display showsEnding Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsPhone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the CallPhone screen.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat Steps 8 on page 79 and 9 onpage 80 or wait for the telephone user to end thecall.

When the telephone user ends the call, a tonesounds and the display shows Phone CallEnded.

Making a Call Alias Search

You can also use alias or alphanumeric search toretrieve the required subscriber alias.

This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.

Note:

Press button or to exit alias search.

If you release the PTT button while the radio is settingup the call, it exits without any indication and returnsto the previous screen.

Your radio may be programmed to perform a radiopresence check prior to setting up the Private Call. Ifthe target radio is not available, you hear a short toneand see negative mini notice on the display. Theradio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radiopresence check.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

80

English

Page 83: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

3 Key in the first character of the required alias.A blinking cursor appears.

4 Use the keypad to type the required alias.

Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press the keyto delete any unwanted characters. Long press

to change text entry method.The first line of the display shows the charactersyou keyed in. The next lines of the display showthe short listed search results. The alias search iscase-insensitive. If there are two or more entrieswith the same name, the radio displays the entrythat is listed first in the Contacts list.

5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

6 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.

7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

8 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

9 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

The display shows Call Ended.

Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key

Note: See Making a Group, Private or All Call withthe Programmable Number Key on page 54 fordetails on making a Group, Private or All Call with theprogrammed number key(s).

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

81

English

Page 84: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

4 or to Program Key and press to

select.

5 or to the desired number key and press

to select.

If the number key is currently assigned to anotherentry, the display shows The Key is AlreadyAssigned and then, the first line of the displayshows Overwrite?. Do one of the following.

• or to Yes and press to overwrite

the number key assignment.•

or to No and press to return to theprevious step.

Each entry can be associated to different numberkeys. You see a before each number key that is

assigned to an entry. If the is before Empty, thatnumber key is not assigned.

If a number key is assigned to an entry in aparticular mode, this feature is not supported whenyou long press the number key in another mode.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.

Removing the Association between Entry andProgrammable Number Key

1 Access the required alias or ID via:Radio Control Steps

Programmednumber key

Long press the programmednumber key to the required

alias or ID; press to select.

Menu 1 to access the menuA

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

82

English

Page 85: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Control Steps

2 or to Contacts and

press to select. Theentries are alphabeticallysorted.

3 or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and

press to select.

2 or to Program Key and press to

select.

3 or to Empty and press to select.

The first line of the display shows Clear fromall keys? .

4 or to Yes and press to select.

Note: When an entry is deleted, the associationbetween the entry and its programmed numberkey(s) is removed.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.

Adding a New Contact

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

3 or to New Contact and press to

select.

4 or to the required contact type, eitherRadio Contact or Phone Contact, and press

to select.

5 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and

press to confirm.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

83

English

Page 86: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

6 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and

press to confirm.

7 If adding a Radio Contact, or to the

required ringer type and press to select.The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

Setting a Default Contact

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

3 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

4 or to Set as Default and press to

select.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

A appears beside the selected default alias orID.

Call Indicator SettingsActivating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert

You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for areceived Call Alert.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alert and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

84

English

Page 87: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

7 or to the required tone and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

appears beside selected tone.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for PrivateCalls

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedPrivate Call.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Private Call and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for SelectiveCall

You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for areceived Selective Call.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

85

English

Page 88: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alert and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Selective Call and press to

select.

The current tone is indicated by a

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

7 or to the required tone and press to

select. appears beside selected tone.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for TextMessage

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedText Message.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

86

English

Page 89: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Text Message and press to

select.The current tone is indicated by a .

7 or to the required tone and press to

select. appears beside selected tone.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for TelemetryStatus with Text

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedTelemetry Status with Text.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Telemetry and press to select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

7 Do one of the following:

• or to the preferred tone and press

to select. The display shows Tone <Number>Selected and a appears left of the selectedtone.

• or to Turn Off and press to

select. The display shows Telemetry RingerOff and a appears left of Turn Off.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

87

English

Page 90: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Assigning Ring Styles

You can program your radio to sound one of tenpredefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alertor a Text Message from a particular contact.

The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigatethrough the list.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

4 or to Edit Ringtone and press to

select.

5 or to the required tone and press to

select. appears beside selected tone.

Escalating Alarm Tone Volume

You can program your radio to continually alert youwhen a radio call remains unanswered. This is doneby automatically increasing the alarm tone volumeover time. This feature is known as Escalert.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Escalert and press to select.

You can also use or to change the selected option.

6Press to enable/disable the Escalert.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

88

English

Page 91: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Call Alert OperationCall Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radiouser to call you back when they are able to do so.

This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDsonly and is accessible through the menu via Contactsor manual dial.

Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert

When you receive a Call Alert page, you see thenotification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID ofthe calling radio on the display.

When you hear a repetitive tone and the LEDblinks yellow, do one of the following:

• Press the PTT button while the display stillshows the Call Alert in the Notification List torespond with a Private Call.

•Press to exit the Notification List. The alertis moved to the Missed Call Log.

See Notification List on page 131 for details aboutthe Notification List.

See for details about the Missed Call List.

Making a Call Alert from the Contact List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

3 Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias or ID directly

• or to the required subscriber alias or

ID and press to select.• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial and press

to select.•

or to Radio Number and press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

89

English

Page 92: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• The first line of the display shows RadioNumber: , the second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter thesubscriber ID you want to page and press

.

4 or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The display shows Call Alert and thesubscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alerthas been sent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows negative mini notice.

Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button

• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to make a Call Alert to the predefined aliasor ID.

The display shows Call Alert and thesubscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alerthas been sent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows negative mini notice.

Emergency OperationAn Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a criticalsituation. You are able to initiate an Emergency atany time on any screen display even when there isactivity on the current channel.

Your dealer can set the duration of a button press forthe programmed Emergency button, except for longpress, which is similar with all other buttons:

• Short press – Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75seconds

• Long press – Between 1.00 second and 3.75seconds

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

90

English

Page 93: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

The Emergency button is assigned with theEmergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer forthe assigned operation of the Emergency button.

Note:

If the short press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then thelong press for the Emergency button is assigned toexit the Emergency mode.

If the long press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then theshort press for the Emergency button is assigned toexit the Emergency mode.

Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

• Emergency Alarm• Emergency Alarm with Call• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow

Note: Only ONE of the Emergency Alarms above canbe assigned to the programmed Emergency button.

In addition, each alarm has the following types:

• Regular – Radio transmits an alarm signal andshows audio and/or visual indicators.

• Silent – Radio transmits an alarm signal withoutany audio or visual indicators. Radio receives callswithout any sound through the radio’s speaker,until you press the PTT button to initiate the call.

• Silent with Voice – Radio transmits an alarmsignal without any audio or visual indicators, butallow incoming calls to sound through the radio’sspeaker.

Receiving an Emergency Alarm

On receiving an emergency alarm the emergencyicon appears, a tone sounds, the LED blinks red andthe radio displays the emergency caller alias. If morethan one alarm has occurred all emergency calleraliases are displayed in an Alarm List.

1 When receiving an emergency alarm, do one ofthe following:

• If a single emergency call alias is displayed,

press to view more details. press again to view your action details.

• If the multiple emergency caller aliases aredisplayed in the Alarm List, or to the

required alias and press to view more

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

91

English

Page 94: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

details. Press again to view your actionitems.

2Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm List.

To revisit the Alarm List, press to access themenu and select Alarm List.

Responding to an Emergency Alarm

1 In the Alarm List, or to the required alias.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment thetransmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is now available for use.

3 Press PTT button to transmit non-emergencyvoice to the same group that the EmergencyAlarm was targeted to.Emergency voice can only be transmitted by theemergency initiating radio. All other radios

(including the emergency receiving radio) transmitnon-emergency voice.The LED lights up solid green. Your radio remainsin the Emergency mode.

4 Do one of the following:

• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (ifenabled) and speak clearly into themicrophone.

• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the emergency initiating radio responds, theLED blinks green.You see the Group Call icon, thegroup ID, and transmitting radio ID on yourdisplay.

6 Your radio displays the Alarm List.

Sending an Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm,a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indicationon a group of radios.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

92

English

Page 95: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If your radio is set to Silent, it will not display anyaudio or visual indicators during Emergency mode.

Press the programmed Emergency On button.

The display shows one of the following:

• Tx Alarm and the destination alias.• Tx Telegram and the destination alias.

The LED lights up solid green and the Emergencyicon appears on the Home screen display.

When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement isreceived, the Emergency tone sounds and theLED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent.

If your radio does not receive an EmergencyAlarm acknowledgement, and after all retries havebeen exhausted, a tone sounds and the displayshows Alarm Failed.

Radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode andreturns to the Home screen.

Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarmto a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by aradio within the group, the group of radios can

communicate over a programmed Emergencychannel.

If your radio is set to Silent, it will not display anyaudio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, orallow any received calls to sound through the radio’sspeaker, until you press the PTT button to initiate thecall.

If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it will notdisplay any audio or visual indicators duringEmergency mode, but allow incoming calls to soundthrough the radio’s speaker. The indicators will onlyappear once you press the PTT button to initiate, orrespond to, the call.

1 Press the programmed Emergency On button.

The display shows one of the following:

• Tx Alarm and the destination alias• Tx Telegram and the destination alias

The LED lights up solid green and the Emergencyicon appears on the Home screen display.

When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement isreceived, the Emergency tone sounds and theLED blinks green. The display shows AlarmSent.Your radio enters the emergency call mode

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

93

English

Page 96: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

when the display shows Emergency and thedestination group alias.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green and the Group iconappears on the display.

4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• the Talk Permit Tone• the PTT Sidetone

5 Release the PTT button to listen.If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

6 Press the PTT button to respond.

7 Once your call ends, press Emergency Off buttonto exit the Emergency mode.The radio returns to the Home screen.

Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarmto a group of radios. Your radio’s microphone isautomatically activated, allowing you to communicatewith the group of radios without pressing the PTTbutton.

This activated microphone state is also known as “hotmic”.

If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled,repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are madefor a programmed duration.

Note: During Emergency Cycle Mode, received callssound through the radio’s speaker.

If you press the PTT button during the programmedprogrammed receiving period, you will hear a prohibittone, indicating that you should release the PTTbutton. The radio ignores the PTT press and remainsin Emergency mode.

Note: If you press the PTT button during hot mic, andcontinue to press it after the hot mic duration expires,the radio continues to transmit until you release thePTT button.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

94

English

Page 97: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If your radio is set to Silent, it will not display anyaudio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, orallow any received calls to sound through the radio’sspeaker, until the programmed hot mic transmissionperiod is over, and you press the PTT button.

If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it will notdisplay any audio or visual indicators duringEmergency mode when you are making the call withhot mic, but allow sound through the radio’s speakerwhen the target radio responds after the programmedhot mic transmission period is over. The indicators willonly appear when you press the PTT button.

Note: If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radiodoes not retry to send the request, and enters the hotmic state directly.

1 Press the programmed Emergency On button.The display shows one of the following:

• Tx Alarm and the destination alias.• Tx Telegram and the destination alias.

The LED lights up solid green and the Emergencyicon is displayed.

2 Once the display showsAlarm Sent, speak clearlyinto the microphone.

When hot mic has been enabled, the radioautomatically transmits without a PTT press untilthe hot mic duration expires. While transmitting,the LED lights up solid green and the Emergencyicon appears on the display.

3 The radio automatically stops transmitting whenthe cycling duration between hot mic and receivingcalls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode isenabled.

4 Once the hot mic duration expires, the radioautomatically stops transmitting. To transmitagain, press the PTT button.

Reinitiating an Emergency Mode

Note: This feature is only applicable to the radiosending the Emergency Alarm.

There are two instances where this can happen:

• You change the channel while the radio is inEmergency mode. This exits the Emergencymode. If Emergency Alarm is enabled on this newchannel, the radio reinitiates Emergency.

• You press the programmed Emergency Onbutton during an Emergency initiation/transmission

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

95

English

Page 98: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

state. This causes the radio to exit this state, andto reinitiate Emergency.

Exiting Emergency Mode

Note: This feature is only applicable to the radiosending the Emergency Alarm.

Your radio exits Emergency mode when one of thefollowing occurs:

• Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received(for Emergency Alarm only)

• All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted• The Emergency Off button is pressed.

Note:

If your radio is powered off, it exits the Emergencymode. The radio will not reinitiate the Emergencymode automatically when it is turned on again.

If you change channels when your radio is inEmergency mode to a channel that has noemergency system configured, No Emergency isshown on your display.

Analog Message Encode Your radio is able to send pre-programmedmessages from the Message list to a radio alias or tothe dispatcher.

Sending MDC Message Encode to Dispatcher

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Message and press to select.

3 or to Quick Text and press to

select.

4 or to the required message. Press to

send.

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

96

English

Page 99: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds andthe display shows negative mini notice.

Sending 5–Tone Message Encode to Contact

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Message and press to select.

3 or to Quick Text and press to

select.

4 or to the required message. Press to

select.

5 or to the required contact. Press to

select.

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds andthe display shows negative mini notice.

Analog Status UpdateYour radio is able to send preprogrammed messagesfrom the Status List indicating your current activity toa radio contact (for 5-Tone systems) or to thedispatcher (for MDC systems).

The last acknowledged message is kept at the top ofthe Status List. The other messages are arranged inalphanumeric order.

Sending Status Update to Predefined Contact

1 or to Status and press to select.

2 or to the required status and press to

select.

3 or to Set as Default and press to

select.

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your status update is being sent.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

97

English

Page 100: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If the status update is acknowledged, a tonesounds and the display shows positive mini notice.A appears beside the acknowledged status.

If the status update is not acknowledged, a lowtone sounds and the display shows negative mininotice. A remains beside the previous status.

For 5-Tone systems, see for details on setting thedefault contact.

For 5-Tone systems, a PTT button press while in thestatus list sends the selected status update andreturns to the Home screen to initiate a voice call.

Viewing a 5-Tone Status Details

Note: A Software License Key sold separately isrequired to use this feature.

1 or to Status and press to select.

2 or to the required status and press to

select.

3 or to View Details and press to

select.The display shows details of the selected status.

Editing 5–Tone Status Details

1 or to Status and press to select.

2 or to the required status and press to

select.

3 or to Edit and press to select.

4A blinking cursor appears. Press to move one

space to the left. Press to move one space to

the right. Press the key to delete any

unwanted characters. Long press to change

the text entry method.Press once editing iscomplete.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

98

English

Page 101: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

The display shows Status Saved and radioreturns to Status List.

Text Message Features Your radio is able to receive data, for example a textmessage, from another radio or an e-mail application.

The maximum length of characters for a textmessage, including the subject line (seen whenreceiving message from an e-mail application), is 140whereas for receiving this is 280 characters.

The radio exits the current screen once the inactivitytimer expires. Any text message in the writing/editingscreen will automatically be saved to the Drafts folder.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Writing and Sending a Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Radio Controls Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Compose and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

3 Use the keypad to type your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

4Press once message is composed.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

99

English

Page 102: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-edit, or delete the newly composed message, doone of the following.

• or to Send, and press to send the

message.•

or to Save, and press to save themessage to the Drafts folder.

• to edit the message.

• to choose between deleting the message

or saving it to the Drafts folder.

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 103

Sending a Quick Text Message with the One TouchAccess Button

• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to send a predefined Quick Text messageto a predefined alias or ID.

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 103).

Accessing the Drafts Folder

You can save a text message to send it at a latertime.

If a PTT button press or a mode change causes theradio to exit the text message writing/editing screenwhile you are in the process of writing or editing a textmessage, your current text message is automaticallysaved to the Drafts folder.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

100

English

Page 103: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

The most recent saved text message is always addedto the top of the Drafts list.

The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) lastsaved messages. When the folder is full, the nextsaved text message automatically replaces the oldesttext message in the folder.

Note:

Long press at any time to return to the Homescreen.

Viewing a Saved Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message

1Press again while viewing the message.

2 or to Edit and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

3 Use the keypad to type your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

101

English

Page 104: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4Press once message is composed.

5 Select the message recipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display shows RadioNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved tothe Sent Items folder and marked with a SendFailed icon.

Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

4 or to Delete and press to delete the

text message.Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

102

English

Page 105: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages

You can select one of the following options while atthe Resend option screen:

• Resend• Forward• Edit

Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital orCapacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not amatch, you can only edit and forward a Fail-to-Sendmessage.

Resending a Text Message

•Press to resend the same message to thesame subscriber/group alias or ID.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, the display showsnegative mini notice.

Forwarding a Text Message

Select Forward to send the message to anothersubscriber/ group alias or ID.

1 or to Forward and press to select.

2 • or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display shows RadioNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Editing a Text Message

Select Edit to edit the message before sending it.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

103

English

Page 106: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Note: If a subject line is present (for messagesreceived from an e-mail application), you cannot editit.

1 or to Edit and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

2 Use the keypad to edit your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

3Press once message is composed.

4 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-edit, or delete the newly composed message, doone of the following.

• or to Send, and press to send the

message.

• or to Save, and press to save the

message to the Drafts folder.•

to edit the message.•

to choose between deleting the messageor saving it to the Drafts folder.

5 If you are sending the message, select therecipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display shows RadioNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Text Message:<Subscriber/Group Alias or ID>, confirmingyour message is being sent.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

104

English

Page 107: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Managing Sent Text Messages

Once a message is sent to another radio, it is savedin Sent Items. The most recent sent text message isalways added to the top of the Sent Items list.

The Sent Items folder is capable of storing amaximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When thefolder is full, the next sent text message automaticallyreplaces the oldest text message in the folder.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Viewing a Sent Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Radio Controls Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Sent Items and press to

select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.

The icon at the top right corner of the screenindicates the status of the message (see Sent ItemIcons on page 36).

Sending a Sent Text Message

You can select one of the following options whileviewing a sent text message:

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

105

English

Page 108: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Resend• Forward• Edit• Delete

Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital orCapacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not amatch, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sentmessage.

1Press again while viewing the message.

2 or to one of the options described next

and press to select.Option Steps

Forward Select Forward to send the selectedtext message to another subscriber/group alias or ID (see Forwarding aText Message on page 103).

Edit Select Edit to edit the selected textmessage before sending it (see Editinga Text Message on page 103).

Option Steps

Delete Select Delete to delete the textmessage.

Resend Select Resend to resend the selectedtext message to the same subscriber/group alias or ID.

The display shows transitional mininotice, confirming that the samemessage is being sent to the sametarget radio.

If the message is sent successfully, atone sounds and the display showspositive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a lowtone sounds and the display showsnegative mini notice.

If the message fails to send, the radioreturns you to the Resend option

screen. Press to resend themessage to the same subscriber/groupalias or ID.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

106

English

Page 109: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Option Steps

Note: Changing the volume, and

pressing any button, except for ,, or , returns you to the

message.

Note: The radio exits the Resendoption screen if you press the PTTbutton to initiate a Private or GroupCall, or to respond to a Group Call.The radio also exits the screen whenit receives a text or telemetrymessage, an emergency call or alarm,or a call alert.

Note: The display returns to theResend option screen if you press thePTT button to respond to a PrivateCall (except when the radio isdisplaying the Missed Call screen),and at the end of an All Call.

If you exit the message sending screen while themessage is being sent, the radio updates thestatus of the message in the Sent Items folder

without providing any indication in the display orvia sound.

If the radio changes mode or powers down beforethe status of the message in Sent Items isupdated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks itwith a Send Failed icon.

The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-Progress messages at one time. During thisperiod, the radio cannot send any new messageand automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.

Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

107

English

Page 110: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Controls Steps

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Sent Items and press to

select.

When you select Sent Items and it contains notext messages, the display shows List Empty,and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turnedon (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page133).

3 or to Delete All and press to

select.

4 Choose one of the following.

• or to Yes and ppress to select.

The display shows positive mini notice.

• or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Receiving a Text Message

When your radio receives a message, the displayshows the alias or ID of the sender and the Messageicon .

You can select one of the following options whenreceiving a text message:

• Read?• Read Later• Delete

Note:

The radio exits the Text Message alert screen andsets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of themessageif the PTT button is pressed when the radiois displaying the alert screen.

Reading a Text Message

1 or to Read? and press to select.

Selected message in the Inbox opens.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

108

English

Page 111: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.

2 Do one of the following:

•Press to return to the Inbox.

•Press a second time to reply, forward, ordelete the text message.

Managing Received Text Messages

Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. TheInbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30messages.

Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according tothe most recently received.

Your radio supports the following options for textmessages:

• Reply• Forward• Delete• Delete All

Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital orCapacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not amatch, you can only forward, delete, or delete allReceived messages.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and press to select.

3 or to Inbox and press to select.

4 or toview the messages.

A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.

5 Do one of the following:

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

109

English

Page 112: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

•Press to select the current message, and

press again to reply, forward, or deletethat message.

•Long press to return to the Home screen.

Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message fromthe Inbox

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and press to select.

3 or to Inbox and press to select.

4 or to the required message and press

to select.You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status textmessage.

The display shows Telemetry: <Status TextMessage>.

5Long press to return to the Home screen.

Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

110

English

Page 113: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.

4Press once more to access the sub-menu.

5 Do one of the following:

• or to Reply and press to select.

• or to Quick Reply and press to

select.

A blinking cursor appears.

6 Use your keypad to write/edit your message.

7Press once message is composed.

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice,

If the message cannot be sent,a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice,

If the message cannot be sent, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 103).

Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

111

English

Page 114: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.

4Press once more to access the sub-menu.

5 or to Delete and press to select.

6 or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows positive mini notice and thescreen returns to the Inbox.

Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

Radio Controls Steps

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

When you select Inbox and it contains no textmessages, the display shows List Empty, andsounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page133).

3 or to Delete All and press to

select.

4 or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows positive mini notice.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

112

English

Page 115: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Job TicketsYour radio is able to receive Job Tickets, which aremessages from the dispatcher listing out tasks thatneed to be performed.

You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort theminto Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are“All", "New", "Started", and "Completed". Check withyour dealer or system administrator for an additional10 folders.

Your radio supports a maximum of 100 Job Tickets,all of which can be seen in the "All" folder. New JobTickets and Job Tickets with recent change in stateare listed first. Upon reaching the maximum numberof Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automaticallyreplaces the last Job Ticket in your radio.

Note:

Job Tickets are retained even after radio is powereddown and powered up again.

Your radio will automatically detect and discard theduplicated Job Tickets with the same subject line.

Accessing the Job Ticket Folder

Access the Job Ticket folder.

Radio Control Steps

ProgrammedJob Ticketbutton

1 Press the programmed JobTicket button.

2 or to the required

folder and press toselect.

Note: You can also press

and the correspondingnumber key (1–9) to accessthe required folder.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Job Tickets

and press to select.3 or to the required

folder and press toselect.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

113

English

Page 116: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Control Steps

Note: You can also press

and the correspondingnumber key (1–9) to accessthe required folder.

4 or to the required

Job Ticket and press toselect.

Responding to the Job Ticket

1 to access the menu

2 or to Job Tickets and press to

select

3 or to the required folder and press to

select.You can also press the corresponding number key(1–9) to access the required folder.

4 or to the required Job Ticket and press

to select.

5Press once more to access the sub-menu.You can also press the corresponding number key(1–9) to Quick Reply.

6 or to the required Job Ticket and press

to select.You can also press the corresponding number key(1–9) to respond to the job ticket.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour message being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the displayshows positive mini notice.

If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and thedisplay shows negative mini notice.

Deleting a Job Ticket

Delete a Job Ticket.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

114

English

Page 117: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Control Steps

ProgrammedJob Ticketbutton

1 Press the programmed JobTicket button.

2 or to All and press

to select

Menu 1 to access the menu

2 or to Job Tickets

and press to select3 or to All and press

to select4 or to the required

Job Ticket and press toselect.

Note: At Step 4, whileviewing the Job Ticket,

press to delete.

Radio Control Steps

5Press again whileviewing the Job Ticket.

6 or to Delete and

press to select

Note: You can also press

to delete.

Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to preventeavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channelby the use of a software-based scrambling solution.The signaling and user identification portions of atransmission are not scrambled.

Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channelto send a privacy-enabled transmission, although thisis not a necessary requirement for receiving atransmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel,the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled)transmissions.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

115

English

Page 118: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Your radio supports two types of privacy:

• Basic Privacy• Enhanced Privacy.

Only ONE of the privacy types above can beassigned to the radio.

To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or datatransmission, your radio must be programmed tohave the same Privacy Key (for Basic Privacy), ORthe same Key Value and Key ID (for EnhancedPrivacy) as the transmitting radio.

If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of adifferent Privacy Key, OR a different Key Value andKey ID, you will either hear a garbled transmission(Basic Privacy) or nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy).

The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio isreceiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.

You can access this feature by

• Pressing the programmed Privacy button totoggle privacy on or off.

• Using the Radio Menu as described by the stepsdescribed next.

Note: Some radio models may not offer this Privacyfeature. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Privacy and press to select.

You can also use or to change selected option.

5Press to enable/disable Privacy.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

116

English

Page 119: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF)The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) featureallows the radio to operate in a radio system with aninterface to telephone systems.

1 Press and hold the PTT button to initiate a DTMFcall.

2 Enter the desired number, * or #.You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling allradio tones and alerts (see Turning the RadioTones/Alerts On or Off on page 137).

Multi-Site Controls These features are applicable when your currentradio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or LinkedCapacity Plus configuration.

See IP Site Connect on page 40 and Linked CapacityPlus on page 41 for more details about theseconfigurations.

Starting an Automatic Site Search

Note: The radio only scans for a new site if thecurrent signal is weak or when the radio is unable to

detect any signal from the current site. If the RSSIvalue is strong, the radio remains on the current site.

RadioControl

Description

Site LockOn/Offbutton

Press the programmed Site LockOn/Off button to toggle the start/stopautomatic site search.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.4 or to Site Roaming and

press to select.5 or to Site Lock and

press to select.

If the current channel is:

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

117

English

Page 120: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• a multi-site channel with an attached roam listAND

• is out of range,

the radio also performs an automatic site search(that is the site is unlocked) during

• a PTT button press or• data transmission.

A tone sounds and the display shows SiteUnlocked.

The radio then returns to the Home screen. Thedisplay shows the Site Roaming icon and channelalias.

The LED blinks yellow rapidly when the radio isactively searching for a new site, and turns offonce the radio locks on to a site.

Stopping an Automatic Site Search

When your radio is actively searching for a newsite, you can stop the search by

RadioControl

Description

Site LockOn/Offbutton

Press the programmed Site LockOn/Off button to stop automatic sitesearch.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.4 or to Site Roaming and

press to select.5 or to Site Lock and

press to select.

A tone sounds and the display shows SiteLocked.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

118

English

Page 121: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

The radio then returns to the Home screen. TheLED turns off and the display shows the channelalias.

Starting a Manual Site Search

Start a Manual Site Search byRadioControl

Description

ManualSiteRoambutton

Press the programmed Manual SiteRoam button to start the manual sitesearch.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.4 or to Site Roaming and

press to select.

RadioControl

Description

5 or to Active Search

and press to select.

A tone sounds, the display shows Finding Site,and the LED blinks green.

If a new site is found, a tone sounds and the LEDturns off. The display shows Site <Alias>Found.

If there is no available site within range, a tonesounds and the LED turns off. The display showsOut of Range.

If a new site is within range, but the radio is unableto connect to it, a tone sounds and the LED turnsoff. The display shows Channel Busy.

The radio returns to the Home screen.

SecurityYou can enable or disable any radio in the system.For example, you might want to disable a stolen

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

119

English

Page 122: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enablethat radio, when it is recovered.

Note: Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limitedto radios with these functions enabled. Check withyour dealer or system administrator for moreinformation.

Radio Disable

1 Access this feature byRadioControls

Steps

RadioDisablebutton

1 Press the programmed RadioDisable button.

2 or to the required alias or

ID and press to select.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press

to select. The entries arealphabetically sorted.

RadioControls

Steps

3 Use one of the steps describednext to select the requiredsubscriber alias or ID

• select the required alias or IDdirectly

• or to the required

alias or ID and press to select.

• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial

and press to select.• or to Radio

Number and press toselect.

• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number: .A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

120

English

Page 123: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControls

Steps

the second line of thedisplay shows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypad toenter the subscriber alias

or ID and press .4 or to Radio Disable

and press to select.

The display shows Radio Disable:<Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lightsup solid green.

2 Wait for acknowledgment.

If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicatortone and the display shows positive mini notice.

If not successful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone and the display shows negative mininotice.

Do not press during the Radio Disableoperation as you will not get an acknowledgementmessage.

Radio Enable

1 Access this feature byRadioControls

Steps

RadioEnablebutton

1 Press the programmed RadioEnable button.

2 or to the required alias or

ID and press to select.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press

to select. The entries arealphabetically sorted.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

121

English

Page 124: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControls

Steps

3 Use one of the steps describednext to select the requiredsubscriber alias or ID

• select the required alias or IDdirectly

• or to the required

alias or ID and press to select.

• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial

and press to select.• or to Radio

Number and press toselect.

• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number: .

RadioControls

Steps

the second line of thedisplay shows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypad toenter the subscriber alias

or ID and press .4 or to Radio Enable and

press to select.

The display shows Radio Enable: <SubscriberAlias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.

2 Wait for acknowledgment.

If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicatortone and the display shows positive mini notice.

If not successful,the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone and the display shows negative mininotice.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

122

English

Page 125: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Do not press during the Radio Enableoperation as you will not get an acknowledgementmessage.

Lone WorkerThis feature raises an emergency if there is no useractivity, such as any radio button press or activationof the channel selector, for a predefined time.

Before raising the emergency, when the inactivitytimer expires, the radio warns the user via an audioindicator.

If there is still no acknowledgement by the userbefore the predefined reminder timer expires, theradio initiates an Emergency Alarm.

Only one of the following Emergency Alarms can beassigned to this feature:

• Emergency Alarm• Emergency Alarm with Call• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow

The radio remains in the emergency state allowingvoice messages to proceed until action is taken. See

Emergency Operation on page 90 on ways to exitEmergency.

Note: This feature is limited to radios with thisfunction enabled. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

Password Lock FeaturesIf enabled, this feature only allows you access yourradio if the correct password is entered uponpowering up.

Accessing the Radio from Password

1 Power up your radio.You hear a continuous tone.

2 Do one of the following: Enter your current four-digit password. Press or to edit each digit’s

numeric value. Each digit changes to . Press

to move to next digit. Press to confirm yourselection.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

123

English

Page 126: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Enter your current four-digit password with theradio’s keypad. The second line of the display

shows . Press to proceed.• Enter your current four-digit password. Press

or to edit each digit’s numeric value.

Each digit changes to . Press to move to

next digit. Press to confirm your selection.

You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit

entered. Press to remove the last on thedisplay. You hear a negative indicator tone, if you

press when the second line of the display isempty, or if you press more than four digits.

If the password is correct, your radio proceeds topower up. See Powering Up the Radio on page21.

If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password. Repeat Steps 1 on page 123and 2 on page 123.

After the third incorrect password, the displayshows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio

Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinksyellow.

Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes,and responds to inputs from On/Off/VolumeControl Knob and programmed Backlight buttononly.

Note:

The radio is unable to receive any call, includingemergency calls, in locked state.

Unlocking the Radio from Locked State

1 If your radio was powered down after being in thelocked state, power up the radio.A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.The display shows Radio Locked.

2 Wait for 15 minutes.Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for lockedstate when you power up.

3 Repeat Steps 1 on page 123 and 2 on page 123 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 123.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

124

English

Page 127: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Turning the Password Lock On or Off

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5 Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 on page 123 in Accessing the Radiofrom Password on page 123.

6Press to proceed.

If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.

7 If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, press to enable/disable passwordlock.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Changing the Password

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5 Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 on page 123 in Accessing the Radiofrom Password on page 123.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

125

English

Page 128: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

6Press to proceed.If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.

7 If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, or to Change Pwd and press to select.

8 Enter a new four-digit password.See Step 2 on page 123 in Accessing the Radiofrom Password on page 123.

9 Reenter the previously entered four-digitpassword. See Step 2 on page 123 in Accessingthe Radio from Password on page 123.

10Press to proceed.

If the reentered password matches the newpassword entered earlier, the display showsPassword Changed.

If the reentered password does NOT match thenew password entered earlier, the display showsPasswords Do Not Match.

The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.

Bluetooth OperationThis feature allows you to use your radio with aBluetooth enabled device (accessory) via a wirelessBluetooth connection. Your radio supports bothMotorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.

Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32feet) line of sight.This is an unobstructed pathbetween your radio and your Bluetooth-enableddevice.

It is not recommended that you leave your radiobehind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device towork with a high degree of reliability when they areseparated.

At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tonequality will start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. Tocorrect this problem, simply position your radio and

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

126

English

Page 129: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (withinthe 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to reestablishclear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth functionhas a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-meter/32 feet range.

Your radio can support up to 3 simultaneousBluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enableddevices of unique types. For example, a headset, ascanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multipleconnections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of thesame type are not supported.

Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device’s full capabilities.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to My Status and press to select.

The display shows On and Off. The current statusis indicated by a .

4 Do one of the following:

• or to On and press to select. The

display shows On and a appears left of theselected status.

• or to Off and press to select. The

display shows Off and a appears left of theselected status.

Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device

Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or

press during the finding and connectingoperation as this cancels the operation.

1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and placeit in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

2On your radio, press to access the menu.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

127

English

Page 130: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

3 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

4 or to Devices and press to select.

5 Do one of the following:

• or to the required device and press

to select.• or to Find Devices to locate available

devices. or to the required device and

press to select.

6 or to Connect and press to select.

Display shows Connecting to <Device>. YourBluetooth-enabled device may require additionalsteps to complete the pairing. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

If successful, the radio display shows <Device>Connected. A tone sounds and appears besidesthe connected device. The Bluetooth Connected iconappears on the status bar.

If unsuccessful, the radio display shows ConnectingFailed .

Note: If pin code is required, use the same entrymethod as Step 2 on page 123 in Accessing theRadio from Password on page 123.

Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device(Discoverable Mode)

Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during thefinding and connecting operation as this may cancelthe operation.

1 Turn Bluetooth On.See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 127.

2 to access the menu.

3 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

4 or to Find Me and press to select.

Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed duration. Thisis called Discoverable Mode.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

128

English

Page 131: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair itwith your radio.Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual.

Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device

1On your radio, press to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Disconnect and press to

select.Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.Your Bluetooth-enabled device may requireadditional steps to disconnect. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. Apositive indicator tone sounds and disappearsbeside the connected device. The BluetoothConnected icon disappears on the status bar.

Switching Audio Route

You can toggle audio routing between internal radiospeaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.

Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switchbutton.

• A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Radio.

• A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Bluetooth.

Viewing Device Details

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

129

English

Page 132: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to View Details and press to

select.

Editing Device Name

You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enableddevices.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Edit Name and press to select.

6Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press to delete

any unwanted characters. Long press tochange text entry method.A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to typethe required zone.

7 The display shows Device Name Saved.

Deleting Device Name

You can remove a disconnected device from the listof Bluetooth-enabled devices.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

130

English

Page 133: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Delete and press to select.

The display shows Device Deleted.

Bluetooth Mic Gain

Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enableddevice’s microphone gain value.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to BT Mic Gain and press to

select.

4 or to the BT Mic Gain type and the currentvalues.

To edit values, press to select.

5 or to increase or to decrease values and

press to select.

Notification ListYour radio has a Notification List that collects all your“unread” events on the channel, such as unread textmessagestelemetry messages and missed calls.Unread Job Tickets are also stored in the notificationlist.

The Notification icon appears on the status bar whenthe Notification List has one or more events.

For TMS and missed call/call alert notification events,the maximum number are 30 TMS and 10 missedcalls/call alerts. This maximum number depends onindividual feature (job tickets or TMS or missed calls/call alerts) list capability.

Note: After the events are read, they are removedfrom the Notification List.

Accessing the Notification List

1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

131

English

Page 134: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

2 or to Notification and press to

select.

3 or to the required event and press to

select.

Long press to return to the Home Screen.

Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) ARTS is an analog-only feature designed to informyou when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-equipped radios.

ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signalsperiodically to confirm that they are within range ofeach other. Your dealer can program your radio totransmit or receive the ARTS signal.

Your radio provides indications of states as follows:

• First-Time Alert – A tone sounds and the displayshows In Range after the channel alias.

• ARTS-in-Range Alert – A tone sounds, ifprogrammed, and the display shows In Rangeafter the channel alias.

• ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert – A tone sounds, theLED rapidly blinks red, and the display alternatesbetween Out of Range and the home screen.

Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP)Your radio can be updated by your dealer remotely,via OTAP, without needing to be physicallyconnected. Additionally, some settings can also beconfigured via OTAP.

While undergoing OTAP, the LED blinks green.

Note: When the radio is receiving high volume data,the High Volume Data icon appears and channel isbusy. A PTT button press at this time may cause anegative tone to sound.

Once the programming is complete, depending onyour radio’s configuration:

• A tone sounds, the display shows UpdatingRestarting, and your radio restarts (powers offand on again).A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

132

English

Page 135: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Select between Restart Now or Postpone.Selecting Postpone allows your radio to return tothe previous display, with an OTAP Timer iconvisible, for a period of time before the automaticrestart occurs.

Upon power up after the automatic restart occurs, thedisplay shows Sw Update Completed if the OTAPupdate is successful or Sw Update Failed if theOTAP update is unsuccessful.

See Software Update on page 160 for your updatedsoftware version.

Utilities

Locking and Unlocking the Keypad

You can lock your radio’s keypad to avoid inadvertentkey entry.

To lock/unlock your radio’s keypad.Option Steps

Locking theKeypad

1 to access the menu.

Option Steps

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.4 or to Keypad Lock

and press to select.

You can also use or to changethe selected option.

Unlockingthe Keypad Press followed by .

After the keypad is locked, the display showsKeypad Locked and returns to the Home screen.

After the keypad is unlocked, the display showsKeypad Unlocked and returns to the Homescreen.

Turning Keypad Tones On or Off

You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

133

English

Page 136: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Keypad Tones and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable keypad tones.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Squelch Level

You can adjust your radio's squelch level to filter outunwanted calls with low signal strength or channelsthat have a higher than normal background noise.

Normal is the default. Tight filters out (unwanted)calls and/or background noise; however, calls fromremote locations may also be filtered out.

Press the programmed Squelch button to togglesquelch level between normal and tight. Follow theprocedure described next to access this feature viathe radio’s menus.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Squelch and press to select.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

134

English

Page 137: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 or to the required setting and press

to select. appears besides selected setting. Screen

returns to the previous menu.

Setting the Power Level

You can customize your radio’s power setting to highor low for each channel.

High enables communication with radios located at aconsiderable distance from you. Low enablescommunication with radios in closer proximity.

Press the programmed Power Level button to toggletransmit power level between high and low. Followthe procedure described next to access this featurevia the radio’s menus.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Power and press to select.

5 or to the required setting and press

to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time,

long press to return to the Home screen.Screen returns to the previous menu.

Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off

A channel can support up to 6 option board features.Refer to your dealer or system administrator for moreinformation.

• Press the programmed Option Board Featurebutton to toggle the feature on or off.

Identifying Cable Type

You can select the type of cable your radio uses.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

135

English

Page 138: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Cable Type and press to

select.

At Step 4, you can also use or to change theselected option.

5 The current cable type is indicated by a

Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX)Feature On or Off

This feature allows you to initiate a hands-free voiceactivated call on a programmed channel. The radioautomatically transmits, for a programmed period,whenever the microphone on the VOX-capableaccessory detects voice.

Pressing the PTT button during radio operation willdisable VOX. To re-enable VOX, do one of thefollowing:

• Turn the radio off and power it on again• Change the channel via the Channel Selector

Knob• Press the programmed VOX button to toggle the

feature on or off• or follow the steps described next to access this

feature via the radio menu.

If the Talk Permit Tone feature is enabled (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page138), use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait forthe Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearlyinto the microphone.

Note: Turning this feature on or off is limited to radioswith this function enabled. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator for more information.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

136

English

Page 139: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to VOX and press to select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5Press to disable/enable VOX.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off

You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) ifneeded.

Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level

You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level ifneeded. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voicevolume.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Vol. Offset and press to

select.

6 or to the required volume value.The radio sounds a feedback tone with eachcorresponding volume value.

7 Do one of the following:

•Press to keep the required displayedvolume value.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

137

English

Page 140: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

•Press to exit without changing the currentvolume offset settings.

Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Talk Permit and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable the Talk PermitTone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Toneif needed.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

138

English

Page 141: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Power Up and press to select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable the Power Up AlertTone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Text Message Alert Tone

You can customize your radio’s text message alerttone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in theContacts list.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

3 or to the required subscriber alias or ID

and press to select.

4 or to Message Alert and press to

select.The display shows Momentary and Repetitive.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5 or to the required setting and press to

enable appears besides selected setting.

Changing the Display Mode

You can change radio’s display mode between Dayor Night, as needed. This affects the color palette ofthe display.

Change the Display Mode:

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

139

English

Page 142: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Control Steps

ProgrammedDisplay ModeButton

Press the programmed DisplayMode button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

4 or to Display and

press to select.

The display shows DayMode and Night Mode.

Note: You can also use

or to change the selectedoption.

Radio Control Steps

5 or to the required

setting and press toenable. appears besidesselected setting.

Adjusting the Display Brightness

You can adjust radio’s display brightness as needed.

Note: Display brightness cannot be adjusted when“Auto Brightness” is enabled.

Adjust the Display BrightnessRadio Control Steps

ProgrammedDisplayBrightnessButton

1 Press the programmedBrightness button.

2 Decrease display brightness

by pressing or increasethe display brightness by

pressing . Select fromAdv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

140

English

Page 143: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Control Steps

setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

4 or to Brightness

and press to select.

The display shows aprogress bar.

5 Decrease display brightness

by pressing or increasethe display brightness by

Radio Control Steps

pressing . Select from

setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry.

Language

You can set your radio display to be in your requiredlanguage.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Languages and press to select.

You can also use or to change selectedoption.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

141

English

Page 144: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 or to the required language and press

to enable. appears beside selectedlanguage.

Turning the LED Indicator On or Off

You can enable and disable the LED Indicator ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to LED Indicator and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5Press to enable/disable the LED Indicator.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off

You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Intro Screen and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

142

English

Page 145: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable the IntroductionScreen.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Voice Announcement

This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate thecurrent Zone or Channel the user has just assigned,or programmable button press. This audio indicatorcan be customized per customer requirements. Thisis typically useful when the user is in a difficultcondition to read the content shown on the display.

Toggle Voice Announcement On or Off.Radio Control Steps

ProgrammedVoiceAnnouncementButton

Press the programmed VoiceAnnouncement button.

Radio Control Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities

and press to select.3 or to Radio

Settings and press to select.

4 or to VoiceAnnouncement and press

to select.

Note: You can also use

or to change theselected option.

5 Do one of the following:

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

143

English

Page 146: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Control Steps

•Press to enableVoice Announcement.The display shows beside Enabled.

•Press to disableVoice Announcement.The disappears frombeside Enabled.

Call Forwarding

You can enable your radio to automatically forwardvoice calls to another radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Call Forward and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Call Forwarding. Thedisplay shows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Call Forwarding. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Menu Timer

Set the period of time your radio stays in the menubefore it automatically switches to the Home screen.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

144

English

Page 147: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Menu Timer and press to

select.

6 or to the required setting and press

to select.

Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-A)

This feature controls the your radio's microphone gainautomatically while transmitting on an analog system.It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to apreset value in order to provide a consistent level ofaudio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 or to Mic AGC-A and press to select.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Mic AGC-A. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Mic AGC-A. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)

This feature controls the your radio's microphone gainautomatically while transmitting on a digital system. Itsuppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to apreset value in order to provide a consistent level ofaudio.

1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

145

English

Page 148: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 or to Mic AGC-D and press to select.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Mic AGC-D. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Mic AGC-D. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Intelligent Audio

Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volumeto overcome background noise in the environment,inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise

sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature anddoes not affect Transmit audio.

Note: This feature is not applicable during aBluetooth session.

Toggle Intelligent Audio On or Off.Radio Control Steps

ProgrammedIntelligentAudio Button

Press the programmedIntelligent Audio button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

3 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

146

English

Page 149: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Control Steps

4 or to Intelligent

Audio and press toselect.

Note: You can also use

or to change the selectedoption.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enableIntelligent Audio. Thedisplay shows besideEnabled.

•Press to disableIntelligent Audio. The disappears from besideEnabled.

Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature Onor Off

This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedbackin received calls.

Toggle Acoustic Feedback Suppressor FeaturesOn or OffRadio Control Steps

ProgrammedAcousticFeedbackSuppressorButton

Press the programmedAcoustic FeedbackSuppressor button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

147

English

Page 150: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Control Steps

4 or to AF

Suppressor and press to select.

Note: You can also use

or to change the selectedoption.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enableAcoustic FeedbackSuppressor. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disableAcoustic FeedbackSuppressor. The disappears from besideEnabled.

Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion ControlFeature On or Off

This feature allows you to enable the radio toautomatically monitor the microphone input andadjust the microphone gain value to avoid audioclipping.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 or to Mic Distortion and press to

select.

5 Do one of the following:Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

148

English

Page 151: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

•Press to enable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The display shows besideEnabled.

•Press to disable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The disappears frombeside Enabled.

Global Positioning System (GPS)

GPS is a satellite navigation system that determinesthe radio’s precise location. Press the programmedGPS button to toggle the feature on or off.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to GPS and press to select.

5Press to enable/disable GPS

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

See Checking the GPS Information on page 159 fordetails on retrieving GPS information.

Text Entry Configuration

You can configure the following settings for enteringtext on your radio:

• Word Predict• Word Correct• Sentence Cap• My Words

Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

• Numbers• Symbols• Predictive or Multi-Tap• Language (If programmed)

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

149

English

Page 152: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Note: Press at any time to return to the previous

screen or long press to return to the HomeScreen. The radio exits the current screen once theinactivity timer expires.

Word Predict

Your radio can learn common word sequences thatyou often enter. It then predicts the next word youmay want to use after you enter the first word of acommon word sequence into the text editor.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to Word Predict and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Word Predict. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Word Predict. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Sentence Cap

Automatically enables capitalization for the first letterin the first word for every new sentence.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

150

English

Page 153: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to Sentence Cap and press to

select.

6 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Sentence Cap. Thedisplay shows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Sentence Cap. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Viewing Custom Words

You can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list tocontain these words.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to List of Words and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

Editing Custom Word

You can edit the custom words saved in your radio.

1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

151

English

Page 154: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to List of Words and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

7 or to the required word and press to

select.

8 or to Edit and press to select.

9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method. Press once your custom word iscompleted.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Adding Custom Word

You can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary.

1 to access the menu.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

152

English

Page 155: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to Add New Word and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method. Press once your custom word iscompleted.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Deleting a Custom Word

You can delete the custom words saved in your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

153

English

Page 156: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to the required word and press to

select.

7 or to Delete and press to select.

8 Choose one of the following.

•At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.

• or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Deleting All Custom Words

You can delete all custom words from your radio’s in-built.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to Delete All and press to

select.

7 Choose one of the following.

•At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

154

English

Page 157: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Flexible Receive List

Flexible Receive List is a digital-only (currentlysupported in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus)feature that allows you to add, delete or edit memberson the receive talkgroup list. Your radio can support amaximum of 16 members in the list.

Turning the Flexible Receive List On or Off

You can enable and disable the Flexible Receive Listif needed.

Enable the Flexible Receive ListRadio Control Steps

ProgrammedFlexibleReceive ListButton

Press the programmedFlexible Receive List button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

Radio Control Steps

2 or to Flexible Rx

List and press toselect.

3Press to enable ordisable the FlexibleReceive List feature.

Previousdisplay

Current display

Turn On Flexible Rx List On

Turn Off Flexible Rx List Off

Adding a New Entry to the Flexible Receive List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

155

English

Page 158: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Flexible Rx List and press

to select.

5 or to View/Edit List and press to

select.

6 or to Add Member and press to

select.

7 Select the required alias or ID byRadioControl

Steps

RadioNavigationButtons

or to the required alias orID.

Keypad Key in the first character of therequired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

RadioControl

Steps

Press to move one space to the

left. Press to move one space to

the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted characters.

Long press to change thetext entry method.

The first line of the display showsthe characters you keyed in. Thenext lines of the display show theshort listed search results. Thealias search is case-insensitive. Ifthere are two or more aliases withthe same name, the radio displaysthe alias that is listed first in thelist.

8Press to select.The display shows Add Another?.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

156

English

Page 159: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

9 or to No and press to select

The display shows .

Deleting an Entry from the Flexible Receive List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Flexible Rx List and press

to select.

5 or to View/Edit List and press to

select.

6 Select the required alias or ID by

RadioControl

Steps

RadioNavigationButtons

or to the required alias orID.

Keypad Key in the first character of therequired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the

left. Press to move one space to

the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted characters.

Long press to change thetext entry method.

The first line of the display showsthe characters you keyed in. Thenext lines of the display show theshort listed search results. Thealias search is case-insensitive. Ifthere are two or more aliases with

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

157

English

Page 160: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControl

Steps

the same name, the radio displaysthe alias that is listed first in thelist.

7Press to select.

8 or to Delete and press to select.

9 or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows .

Accessing General Radio Information

Your radio contains information on the following:

• Battery• Radio Alias and ID• Firmware and Codeplug Versions• GPS Information• Software Update• Site Information

Press at any time to return to the previous

screen or long press to return to the Homescreen. The radio exits the current screen once theinactivity timer expires.

Accessing the Battery Information

Displays information on your radio battery.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Battery Info and press to

select.

The display shows the battery information.

For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display readsRecondition Battery if the battery requires

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

158

English

Page 161: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After thereconditioning process, the display then shows thebattery information.

Checking the Radio Alias and ID

This feature displays the ID of your radio.

Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button tocheck your radio alias and ID. You hear a positiveindicator tone.

Follow the procedure described next to access thisfeature via the radio screen.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to My ID and press to select.

The first line of the display shows the radio alias.The second line of the display shows the radio ID.

You can also press the programmed Radio Alias andID button to return to the previous screen.Checking the Firmware Version and CodeplugVersion

Displays the firmware version on your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Versions and press to select.

The display shows the current firmware andcodeplug versions.

Checking the GPS Information

Displays the GPS information on your radio, such asvalues of:

• Latitude• Longitude

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

159

English

Page 162: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Altitude• Direction• Velocity• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)• Satellites• Version

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to GPS Info and press to select.

5 or to the required item and press to

select.The display shows the requested GPSinformation.

See Global Positioning System (GPS) on page 149for details on GPS.Software Update

Displays the date and time of the latest softwareupdate carried out via Over-the-Air Programming.

Note: Software Update menu is only available after atleast one successful OTAP session.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to SW Update and press to select.

The display shows the date and time of the latestsoftware update.

See Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) on page 132for details on OTAP session.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

160

English

Page 163: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Site Information

Displays the current Linked Capacity Plus site nameyour radio is on.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Site Info and press to select.

The display shows the current Linked CapacityPlus site name.

See Linked Capacity Plus on page 41 for details onLinked Capacity Plus.

Front Panel Programming (FPP)

Your radio is able to customize certain featureparameters to enhance the use of your radio.

Entering FPP Mode

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Program Radio and press to

select.

Long press at any time to return to the Homescreen.

Editing FPP Mode Parameters

Use the following buttons as required while navigatingthrough the feature parameters:

• , - Scroll through options, increase/decrease values, or navigate vertically.

• - Select the option or enter a sub-menu.

• - Short-press to return to previous menu or to

exit the selection screen. Long-press to return toHome screen.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

161

English

Page 164: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RSSI Values

Your radio shows the Received Signal StrengthIndicator (RSSI) icon at the top of your display. Thisfeature allows you to view the RSSI values.

On the home screen, press three times and

immediately press , all within 5 seconds.The display shows current RSSI values. Long

press the to return to the Home Screen.

See Display Icons on page 32 for details on RSSIicon.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

162

English

Page 165: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Connect Plus Operations

Connect P

lus Operations

163

English

Page 166: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Additional Radio Controls in ConnectPlus Mode

Push-To-Talk (PTT) ButtonThe PTT button on the side of the radio ( ) servestwo basic purposes:

A

• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allowsthe radio to transmit to other radios in the call.

Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Releasethe PTT button to listen.

The microphone is activated when the PTT buttonis pressed.

• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button isused to make a new call (see Making a Radio Callon page 176).

If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk PermitTone On or Off on page 138) is enabled, wait until theshort alert tone ends before talking.

Programmable ButtonsYour dealer can program the programmable buttonsas shortcuts to radio functions depending on theduration of a button press:

• Short press – Pressing and releasing rapidly.• Long press – Pressing and holding for the

programmed duration.• Hold down – Keeping the button pressed.

Note: The programmed duration of a button press isapplicable for all assignable radio/utility functions orsettings. See Emergency Operation on page 199 formore information on the programmed duration of theEmergency button.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

164

English

Page 167: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Assignable Radio Functions

Beacon On/Off – Toggles the Beacon feature on oroff. Requires purchase of Connect Plus Man Downfeature.

Beacon Reset – Resets (cancels) the Beacon tone,but it does not turn the Beacon feature off. Requirespurchase of Connect Plus Man Down feature.

Bluetooth® Audio Switch — Toggles audio routingbetween internal radio speaker and externalBluetooth-enabled accessory.

Busy Queue Cancellation – Exits the busy modewhen a non-Emergency call in the Busy Queue wasinitiated. Emergency calls, once accepted into theBusy Queue, cannot be cancelled.

Contacts — Provides direct access to the Contactslist.

Call Alert — Provides direct access to the contactslist for you to select a contact to whom a Call Alertcan be sent.

Voice Announcement for Channel — Plays zoneand channel announcement voice messages for thecurrent channel. This function is unavailable whenVoice Announcement is disabled.

Voice Announcement On/Off — Toggles voiceannouncement on or off.

Emergency On/Off — Depending on theprogramming, initiates or cancels an emergency.

Man Down Alarms On/Off – Toggles all configuredMan Down Alarms on or off. Requires purchase ofConnect Plus Man Down feature.

Man Down Alarms Reset – If pressed while a ManDown feature Alert Tone is playing, the tone iscancelled and feature timers are reset, but it does notturn the Man Down Alarms off. Requires purchase ofMan Down feature.

Manual Dial — Depending on the programming,initiates a Private Call by keying in any subscriber ID.

One Touch Access — Directly initiates a predefinedPrivate Call, a Call Alert or a Quick Text message.

Privacy — Toggles privacy on or off.

Radio Check — Determines if a radio is active in asystem.

Radio Enable — Allows a target radio to be remotelyenabled.

Additional R

adio Controls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

165

English

Page 168: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Disable — Allows a target radio to be remotelydisabled.

Remote Monitor — Turns on the microphone of atarget radio without it giving any indicators.

Roam Request – Requests to search for a differentsite.

Scan — Toggles scan on or off.

Site Lock On/Off — When toggled on, the radiosearches the current site only. When toggled off, theradio searches other sites in addition to the currentsite.

Text Message — Selects the text message menu.

Zone — Allows selection from a list of zones.

Assignable Settings or Utility Functions

All Tones/Alerts — Toggles all tones and alerts onor off.

Backlight — Toggles display backlight on or off.

Backlight Brightness — Adjusts the brightnesslevel.

Display Mode — Toggles the day/night display modeon or off.

Keypad Lock — Toggles keypad between lockedand unlocked.

Power Level — Toggles transmit power levelbetween high and low.

Unassigned — Indicates that the button function hasnot yet been assigned.

Identifying Status Indicators in Connect PlusMode

Display Icons

The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries,and menu entries.

The following are icons that appear on the radio’sdisplay. Icons are displayed on the status bar,arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage andare channel specific.

Received Signal Strength Indicator(RSSI)

The number of bars displayedrepresents the radio signal strength.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

166

English

Page 169: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Four bars indicate the strongest signal.This icon is only displayed whilereceiving.

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth feature is enabled butthere is no remote Bluetooth deviceconnected.

Bluetooth Connected

The Bluetooth feature is enabled. Theicon stays lit when a remote Bluetoothdevice is connected.

Notification List has items to review.

or Power Level

Radio is set at Low power or Radio isset at High power.

Tones Disable

Tones are turned off.

Option Board

The Option Board is enabled.

Option Board Non-Function

The Option Board is disabled.

GPS Available

The GPS feature is enabled. The iconstays lit when a position fix is available.

GPS Not Available/Out of Range

The GPS feature is enabled but is notreceiving data from the satellite.

Scan[5][6]

Scan feature is enabled.

Emergency

Radio is in Emergency mode.

Secure

The Privacy feature is enabled.

Additional R

adio Controls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

167

English

Page 170: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Unsecure

The Privacy feature is disabled.

Site Roaming[5]

The site roaming feature is enabled.

Battery

The number of bars (0 – 4) shownindicates the charge remaining in thebattery. Blinks when the battery is low.

Call Icons

The following icons appear on the radio’s displayduring a call. These icons also appear in the Contactslist to indicate ID type.

Private Call

Indicates a Private Call in progress. Inthe Contacts list, it indicates asubscriber alias (name) or ID(number).

Group Call/All Call

Indicates a Group Call or All Call inprogress. In the Contacts list, itindicates a group alias (name) or ID(number).

Dispatch Call

The Dispatch Call contact type is usedto send a text message to adispatcher PC through a third-partyText Message Server.

5 Not applicable in Capacity Plus6 Not applicable in Linked Capacity Plus

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

168

English

Page 171: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Advanced Menu Icons

The following icons appear beside menu items thatoffer a choice between two options or as an indicationthat there is a sub-menu offering two options.

Checkbox (Empty)

Indicates the option is not selected.

Checkbox (Checked)

Indicates the option is selected.

Solid Black Box

Indicates the option selected for the menuitem with a sub-menu.

Sent Item Icons

The following icons appear at the top right corner ofthe radio’s display in the Sent Items folder.

OR

Sent Successfully

The text message is sent successfully.

OR

In-Progress

• The text message to a group alias or IDis pending transmission.

• The text message to a subscriber aliasor ID is pending transmission, followedby waiting for acknowledgement.

Bluetooth Device Icons

The following icons also appear next to items in thelist of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicatethe device type.

Bluetooth Data Device

Bluetooth-enabled data device, suchas a scanner.

Additional R

adio Controls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

169

English

Page 172: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Bluetooth Audio Device

Bluetooth-enabled audio device,such as a headset.

Bluetooth PTT Device

Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, suchas a PTT-Only Device (POD).

LED Indicator

The LED indicator ( ) shows the operational status ofyour radio.

A

Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low batterycondition, receiving an emergencytransmission or has failed the self-test upon powering up, or hasmoved out of range if radio isconfigured with Auto-RangeTransponder System.

Rapidlyblinking red

Radio is receiving over-the-air filetransfer (Option Board firmware file,Network Frequency file or OptionBoard Codeplug file) or upgrading toa new Option Board firmware file.

Blinkinggreen andyellow

Radio is receiving a Call Alert,received a text message or Scan isenabled and is receiving activity.

Solid yellow Radio is in Bluetooth DiscoverableMode.

Doubleblinkingyellow

Radio is actively searching for a newsite.

Blinkingyellow

Radio is receiving a Call Alert orScan is enabled and is idle (radio willremain muted to any activity).

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

170

English

Page 173: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting.

Blinkinggreen

Radio is powering up, receiving anon-privacy- enabled call or data.

Doubleblinkinggreen

Radio is receiving a privacy-enabledcall.

Indicator Tones

High pitched tone Low pitched tone

Positive Indicator Tone

Negative Indicator Tone

Audio Tones

Audio tones provide you with audible indications ofthe radio’s status or the radio’s response to datareceived.

Continuous Tone A monotone sound.Sounds continuouslyuntil termination.

Periodic Tone Sounds periodicallydepending on theduration set by the radio.Tone starts, stops, andrepeats itself.

Repetitive Tone A single tone thatrepeats itself until it isterminated by the user.

Momentary Tone Sounds only once for ashort period of timedefined by the radio.

Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes

To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you mustchange to another zone, if programmed by yourdealer or system administrator. Check with yourdealer or system administrator to see if your radio hasbeen programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, andwhat features are available while operating in non-Connect Plus zones.

Additional R

adio Controls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

171

English

Page 174: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Making and Receiving Calls in ConnectPlus Mode

Selecting a SiteA site provides coverage for a specific area. AConnect Plus site has a site controller and amaximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, theConnect Plus radio will automatically search for a newsite when the signal level from the current site dropsto an unacceptable level.

Roam Request

A Roam Request tells the radio to search for adifferent site, even if the signal from the current site isacceptable.

If there are no sites available,

• The radio display shows Searching andcontinues to search through the list of sites.

• The radio will return to the previous site, if theprevious site is still available.

Note: This is programmed by your dealer.

Press the programmed Roam Request button.You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switchedto a new site. The display shows Site ID <SiteNumber>.

Site Lock On/Off

When toggled on, the radio searches the current siteonly. When toggled off, the radio searches other sitesin addition to the current site.

Press the programmed Site Lock button.

• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicatingthe radio has locked to the current site. Thedisplay shows Site Locked.

• You hear a negative indicator tone, indicatingthe radio is unlocked. The display shows SiteUnlocked.

Site Restriction

Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has theability to decide which network sites your radio is andis not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to bereprogrammed to change the list of allowed anddisallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at adisallowed site, you see a brief message stating:

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

172

English

Page 175: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radiothen searches for a different network site.

Selecting a ZoneThe radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zonecontains a maximum of 16 assignable positions onthe Channel Selector Knob.

Each assignable knob position can be used to startone of the following voice call types:

• Group Call• Multigroup Call• All Call• Private Call

1 Access the Zone feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedZone button

Press the programmed Zonebutton.

Radio menu 1 to access the menu.

Radio Controls Steps

2 or to Zone and

press to select.

The current zone is displayed and indicated by a.

2 Select the required zone.Radio Control Steps

or or and scroll to therequired zone.

3Press to select.The display shows <Zone> Selectedmomentarily and returns to the selected zonescreen.

Using Multiple NetworksIf your radio has been programmed to use multipleConnect Plus networks, you can select a differentnetwork by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

173

English

Page 176: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

assigned to the desired network. These network-to-zone assignments are configured by your dealerthrough radio programming.

Selecting a Call TypeThe Channel Selector Knob is used to select a calltype. This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, SiteAll Call or Private Call, depending on how your radiois programmed. If you change the Channel SelectorKnob to a different position (that has a call typeassigned to it), this causes the radio to re-registerwith the Connect Plus site. The radio registers withthe Registration Group ID that has been programmedfor the newChannel Selector Knob position call type.

If you select a position that has no call type assignedto it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and thedisplay shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does notoperate when selected to an unprogrammed channel,use the Channel Selector Knob to select aprogrammed channel instead.

Once the required zone is displayed (if you havemultiple zones in your radio), turn the programmedChannel Selector Knob to select the call type.

Receiving and Responding to a Radio CallOnce the channel, subscriber ID or call type isdisplayed, you can proceed to receive and respond tocalls.

The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green when the radio isreceiving.

Note: The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and double blinks green when the radiois receiving a privacy-enabled call . To unscramble a

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

174

English

Page 177: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the samePrivacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID(programmed by your dealer), as the transmittingradio (the radio you are receiving the call from).

Note: See Privacy on page 223 for more information.

Receiving and Responding to a Group Call

To receive a call from a group of users, your radiomust be configured as part of that group.

When you receive a Group Call (while on the Homescreen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text lineshows the caller alias. The second text line displaysthe group call alias. Your radio unmutes and theincoming call sounds through the radio's speaker.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.The LED lights up solid green.

2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

3 Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.

Note: See Making a Group Call on page 177 fordetails on making a Group Call.

Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

A Private Call is a call from an individual radio toanother individual radio.

When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinksgreen. The Private Call icon appears in the top rightcorner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Yourradio unmutes and the incoming call sounds throughthe radio's speaker.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.The LED lights up solid green.

3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

4 Release the PTT button to listen.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

175

English

Page 178: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.

See Making a Private Call on page 177 for details onmaking a Private Call.

Receiving a Site All Call

A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio toevery radio on the site. It is used to make importantannouncements requiring the user’s full attention.

When you receive an All Call, a tone sounds and theLED blinks green.

The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.The first text line shows the caller alias. The secondtext line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes andthe incoming call sounds through the radio speaker.

Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to theprevious screen before receiving the call. A Site AllCall does not wait for a predetermined period of timebefore ending.

You cannot respond to an All Call.

Note: See Making a Site All Call on page 178 fordetails on making a Site All Call.

Note: The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if youswitch to a different channel while receiving the call.During a Site All Call, you will not be able to use anyprogrammed button functions until the call ends.

Making a Radio CallAfter selecting your channel, you can select asubscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

• The Channel Selector Knob.• A programmed One Touch Access button – The

One Touch Access feature allows you to make aPrivate Call to a predefined ID easily. This featurecan be assigned to a short or long programmablebutton press. You can ONLY have one IDassigned to a One Touch Access button. Yourradio can have multiple One Touch Accessbuttons programmed.

• The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page190).

• Manual Dial – This method is for Private Calls onlyand is dialed using the keypad (see Making aPrivate Call from Contacts on page 191, and

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

176

English

Page 179: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Making a Call with the Programmable Manual DialButton on page 179).

Note: Your radio must have the Privacy featureenabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabledtransmission. Only target radios with the same KeyValue and Key ID as your radio will be able tounscramble the transmission.

Note: See Privacy on page 223 for more information.

Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob

Making a Group Call

To make a call to a group of users, your radio mustbe configured as part of that group.

1 Select the channel with the active group alias orID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 174.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Group Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the group call alias.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen. You see the Group Call icon, the groupalias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID onyour display.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. Radio returns to thescreen you were on prior to initiating the call.

Making a Private Call

While you can receive and/or respond to a PrivateCall initiated by an authorized individual radio, yourradio must be programmed for you to initiate a PrivateCall.

You will hear a negative indicator tone, when youmake a Private Call via the Contacts list, Call Log,One Touch Access button, or the Channel SelectorKnob, if this feature is not enabled.

Use the Text Message or Call Alert features tocontact an individual radio. See Text MessageFeatures on page 210 or Call Alert Operation onpage 89 for more information.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

177

English

Page 180: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

1 Do one of the following.

• Select the channel with the active subscriberalias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page174.

• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears on the top right corner. The first textline shows the target subscriber alias. The secondtext line displays the call status.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.

Your radio may be programmed to perform a radiopresence check prior to setting up the Private Call. Ifthe target radio is not available, you hear a short toneand see negative mini notice on the display.Making a Site All Call

This feature allows you to transmit to all users on thesite that are currently not engaged in another call.Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.

Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an AllCall.

1 Select the channel with the active All Call groupalias. See Selecting a Call Type on page 174.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green.The Group Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text lineshows All Call.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

178

English

Page 181: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Making a Multi-group Call

This feature allows you to transmit to all users onmultiple groups. Your radio must be programmed toallow you to use this feature.

Note: Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multi-group Call.

1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select theMulti-group alias or ID.

2 Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe Multi-group alias or ID.

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button

Note: Programmable buttons press must be initiatedfrom the Home screen.

The One Touch Call feature allows you to easilymake a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call aliasor ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or longprogrammable button press.

You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to aOne Touch Call button. Your radio can have multipleOne Touch Call buttons programmed.

1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button tomake a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Callalias or ID.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green.

The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

Making a Call with the Programmable Manual DialButton

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

179

English

Page 182: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Making a Private Call

1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button toenter into the Manual Dial screen.The display shows Number:.

2 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias orPrivate ID.

3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

4 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

6 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

180

English

Page 183: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Advanced Features in Connect PlusMode

Auto FallbackAuto Fallback is a system feature that allows you tocontinue to make and receive non-emergency callson the selected Group Contact in the event of certaintypes of Connect Plus system failures.

If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts toroam to a different Connect Plus site. This searchprocess may result in your radio finding an operableConnect Plus site, or it may result in your radio findinga “Fallback Channel” (if your radio is enabled for AutoFallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that isnormally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but iscurrently unable to communicate with either its sitecontroller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallbackmode, the repeater operates as a single digitalrepeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-emergency Group Calls only. No other call types aresupported in Fallback Mode.

Indications of Auto Fallback Mode

When your radio is using a Fallback channel, youhear the intermittent “Fallback Tone” approximatelyonce every 15 seconds (except while transmitting).The display periodically shows a brief message,“Fallback Channel”. Your radio only permits PTT onthe selected Group Contact (Group Call, MultigroupCall, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to makeother types of calls.

Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode

Note: Calls are heard only by radios that aremonitoring the same Fallback channel and selectedto the same Group. Calls are not networked to othersites or other repeaters.

Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are notavailable in Fallback mode. If you press theemergency button in Fallback mode, the radioprovides an invalid key press tone. Display-equippedradios also show the message, “Feature notavailable”.

Private (radio to radio) calls are not available inFallback mode. If you attempt a call to a privatecontact, you will receive a denial tone. At this point

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

181

English

Page 184: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

you should select a desired group contact. Other non-supported calls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert,Radio Check, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Textmessaging, Location Updates, and packet data calls.

Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is notsupported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more radiousers press PTT at the same time (or at almost thesame time), it is possible that both radios transmituntil PTT is released. In this event, it is possible thatnone of the transmissions will be understood byreceiving radios.

Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normalfunctioning. Simply select the group contact you wishto use (using the radio’s normal channel selectionmethod), and then press the PTT to start your call. Itis possible that the channel may be in use already byanother group. If the channel is in use, you receive abusy tone and the display will say “Channel Busy”.You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Callcontacts using your radio’s normal channel selectionmethod. While the radio is operating on the FallbackChannel, the Multigroup operates just like otherGroups. It is only heard by radios that are currentlyselected to the same Multi-group.

Returning to Normal Operation

If the site returns to normal trunking operation whileyou are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radioautomatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear aregistration “beep” when the radio successfullyregisters. If you are in the range of an operable site(that is not in Fallback mode), you may press theRoam Request button (if programmed for your radio)to force your radio to search for and register on anavailable site. If no other site is available, your radioreturns to Auto Fallback mode after searching iscomplete. If you drive out of coverage of yourFallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode(display indicates “Searching”).

Radio CheckIf enabled, this feature allows you to determine ifanother radio is active in a system without disturbingthe user of that radio. No audible or visual notificationis shown on the target radio.

This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliasesor IDs.

Sending a Radio Check

1 Access the Radio Check feature.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

182

English

Page 185: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Control Steps

ProgrammedRadio Checkbutton

1 Press the programmedRadio Check button.

2 or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and

press to select.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and

press to select.3 or to the required

subscriber alias or ID and

press to select.4 or to Radio Check

and press to select.

The display shows the Target Alias, indicating therequest is in progress. The LED lights up solidgreen.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If the target radio is active in the system, a tonesounds and the display briefly shows TargetRadio Available.

If the target radio is not active in the system, atone sounds and the display briefly shows TargetRadio Not Available.

Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screenwhen initiated via Menu.

Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated viathe programmable button.

Remote MonitorUse the Remote Monitor feature to turn on themicrophone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDsonly). The green LED will blink once on the targetsubscriber. You can use this feature to monitor,remotely, any audible activity surrounding the targetradio.

Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

183

English

Page 186: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Initiating Remote Monitor

Note: Remote Monitor automatically stops after aprogrammed duration or when there is any attempt toinitiate transmission, change channels or power downthe radio.

1 Access the Remote Monitor feature.Radio Control Steps

ProgrammedRemoteMonitorButton

1 Press the programmedRemote Monitor button.

2 or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and

press to select.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and

press to select.3 or to the required

subscriber alias or ID and

press to select.

Radio Control Steps

4 or to Manual Dial

and press to select.5 or to Remote Mon.

and press to select.

The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. Thesecond text line displays the Target Alias,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up blinking green.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display momentarily shows Rem. MonitorSuccessful. Your radio starts playing audio fromthe monitored radio for a programmed durationand display shows Rem. Monitor, followed bytarget alias. Once the timer expires, the radiosounds an alert tone and the LED turns off.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

184

English

Page 187: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone the display shows Rem. MonitorFailed.

ScanThis feature allows your radio to monitor and join callsfor groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list.When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on thestatus bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle.

Starting and Stopping Scan

Note: This procedure turns the Scan feature On orOff for all Connect Plus zones with the same NetworkID as your currently selected zone. It is important tonote that even when the Scan feature is turned on viathis procedure, scan may still be disabled for some(or all) groups on your scan list. See Editing the ScanList on page 187 for more information.

You can start and stop scanning by pressing theprogrammed Scan button OR follow the proceduredescribed next.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Turn On or Turn Off and press

to select.

• The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled.• The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is

enabled.• The display shows Scan Off if scan is

disabled.• The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is

disabled.

Responding to a Transmission During a Scan

During scanning, your radio stops on a group whereactivity is detected. The radio continuously listens forany member in the scan list when idle on the controlchannel.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

2 Press the PTT button during hang time.The LED lights up solid green.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

185

English

Page 188: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

4 Release the PTT button to listen.If you do not respond within the hang time, theradio returns to scanning other groups.

User Configurable ScanIf the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Addand Remove the scan members from the AddMember menu. A Scan List member must be aregular Group Contact (i.e. not Multi-group or Site AllCall/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assignedto a Channel Selector position in a Connect PlusZone with the same Network ID as the currentlyselected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not matchany Talkgroup that has been included in the currentZone's Scan List.

Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or bypressing a programmed Scan On/Off button.

This feature functions only when the radio is notcurrently involved in a call. If you are presentlylistening to a call, your radio cannot scan for othergroup calls, and is therefore unaware they are in

progress. Once your call is finished, your radioreturns to the control channel time slot and is able toscan for groups that are in the scan list.

Turning Scan On or Off

Note: This procedure turns the Scan feature On orOff for all zones with the same Network ID as yourcurrently selected zone. It is important to note thateven when the Scan feature is turned on via thisprocedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all)groups on your scan list. See the next section formore information.

If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on yourdisplay. When Scan is on and you are notparticipating in a call, the LED blinks green andyellow.

The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends onhow your radio is programmed. If programmed with aScan On/Off button, use the button to toggle thefeature on or off. If your radio has been programmedso that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu,follow the procedure described next.

1 to access the menu.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

186

English

Page 189: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Turn On or Turn Off and press

to select.

• The display shows Scan On momentarily ifscan is disabled.

• The display shows Scan Off momentarily ifscan is enabled.

Editing the Scan List

Note: If the scan list entry happens to be the radio’scurrently selected group, the radio listens for activityon this group regardless of whether the list entrycurrently shows a check mark or not. Whenever aradio is not in a call, the radio listens for activity on itsSelected Group, Multigroup, the Site All Call, and itsDefault Emergency Revert Group (if configured forone). This operation cannot be disabled. If Scan isenabled the radio will also listen for activity onenabled Zone Scan List members.

Your scan list determines which groups can bescanned. The list is created when your radio is

programmed. If your radio has been programmed toallow you to edit the scan list, you can,

• Enable/disable scan for individual groups on thelist.

• Add and Remove the scan members from the AddMember menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group viathe Add Members Menu on page 188.

Note: A Scan List member must be a regular GroupContact (i.e. not Multigroup or Site All Call/NetworkWide All Call) that is currently assigned to a ChannelSelector position in a Connect Plus Zone with thesame Network ID as the currently selected Zone.

The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroupthat has been included in the current Zone's ScanList.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to View/Edit List and press to

select.

3 or to the desired Group name.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

187

English

Page 190: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If a check mark precedes the Group name, thenscan is currently enabled for this Group.

If there is no check mark preceding the Groupname, then scan is currently disabled for thisGroup.

4 to select the desired Group.

The display shows Enable if scan is currentlydisabled for the Group.

The display shows Disable if scan is currentlyenabled for the Group.

5 Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable)

and press to select.Depending on which option was selected, theradio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or ScanDisabled as confirmation.

The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scanwas enabled for the Group, the check mark displaysbefore the Group name. If scan was disabled for theGroup, the check mark is removed before the Groupname.

Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu

The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicategroup number or a duplicate group alias to be placedon a zone scan list (or to be shown as a “scancandidate”). Thus, the list of “scan candidates”described in steps 6 on page 189 and 7 on page189 sometimes changes after adding or deleting agroup from the zone scan list.

If your radio has been programmed to allow you toedit the scan list, you can use the Add Membersmenu to add a group to the scan list of the currentlyselected zone, or to delete a group from the san list ofthe currently selected zone.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan option and press to select.

3 or to <Add Members> and press to

select.The display shows “Add Members from Zone n” (n= the Connect Plus zone number of the first

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

188

English

Page 191: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Connect Plus zone in your radio with the sameNetwork ID as your currently selected zone).

4 Do one of the following.

• If the group you want to add to the scan list isassigned to a channel selector position in thatzone, go to step 6 on page 189.

• If the group you want to add to the scan list isassigned to a channel selector position in adifferent Connect Plus zone, go to step 5 onpage 189.

5 or to scroll a list of Connect Plus zonesthat have the same Network ID as the currentlyselected zone.

6 After locating the Connect Plus zone where thedesired group is assigned to a channel selector

position, press to select.

Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groupsassigned to a channel position in that zone. Thegroups on the list are called “scan candidates”,because they can be added to the scan list of yourcurrently selected zone (or they are already on thezone scan list).

If the zone does not have any groups that can beadded to the scan list, the radio displays NoCandidates.

7 or to scroll through the list of candidategroups.

If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately beforethe group alias, this indicates the group iscurrently on the scan list for the selected zone.

If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediatelybefore the alias, the group is not currently on thescan list, but can be added.

8Press when the desired group alias isdisplayed.

If this group is not currently on the scan list for thecurrently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias)message is displayed.

If this group is already on the scan list for thecurrently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias)message is displayed.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

189

English

Page 192: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

9Press to accept the displayed message (Addor Delete).

If deleting a group from the list, you will know theoperation is successful because the plus sign (+)will no longer display immediately before the alias.

If adding a group to the list, you will know theoperation is successful because the plus sign (+)will display before the alias.

If you are attempting to add a group, and the list isalready full, the radio displays List Full. If thisshould occur, it will be necessary to delete a groupfrom the scan list prior to adding a new one.

10When finished, press as many times asnecessary to return to the desired menu.

Understanding Scan Operation

Note: If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan Listmember from a different Zone and Call Hang Timerexpires before you are able to respond, in order torespond, you must navigate to the Zone and Channelof the Scan List Member and start a new call.

There are some circumstances in which you can misscalls for groups that are in your scan list. When youmiss a call for one of the following reasons, this doesnot indicate a problem with your radio. This is anormal scan operation for Connect Plus.

• Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scanicon on the display).

• Scan list member has been disabled via the menu(see Editing the Scan List on page 187).

• You are participating in a call already.• No member of the scanned group is registered at

your site (Multisite systems only).

Contacts SettingsNote: You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for ConnectPlus Contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only beperformed by your dealer.

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, youcan make a privacy-enabled voice call on thatchannel. Only target radios with the same PrivacyKey OR the same Key Value and Key ID as yourradio are able to unscramble the transmission.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

190

English

Page 193: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Contacts provide “address-book” capabilities on yourradio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID thatyou use to initiate a call.

Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100contacts. The following contact types are available:

• Private Call• Group Call• Multigroup Call• Site All Call Voice• Site All Call Text• Dispatch Call

The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a textmessage to a dispatcher PC through a third-partyText Message Server.

Making a Private Call from Contacts

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias:

• select the subscriber alias directly.

• or to the required subscriber alias orID.

• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial and press

to select.• If there was previously dialed subscriber

alias or ID, the alias or ID appears alongwith a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to

edit/enter the ID. Press to select.

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.

6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

191

English

Page 194: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

7 Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen and the display shows the transmittinguser's ID.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.

Making a Call Alias Search

You can also use alias or alphanumeric search toretrieve the required subscriber alias.

This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 Key in the first character of the required alias, andthen press or to locate the required alias.

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.

6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

7 Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

The display shows Call Ended.

Adding a New Contact

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

192

English

Page 195: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

3 or to New Contact and press to

select.

4 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and

press to confirm.

5 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and

press to confirm.

6 If adding a Radio Contact, or to the

required ringer type and press to select.The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows Contact Saved.

Call Indicator SettingsActivating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert

You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for areceived Call Alert.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alert and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

7 or to the required tone and press to

select.

appears beside selected tone.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

193

English

Page 196: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for PrivateCalls

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedPrivate Call.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Private Call and press to

select.

7Press to enable/disable the Private Callringing tones.

The display shows beside Enabled, if PrivateCall ringing tones are enabled.

The is not displayed when Private Call ringingtones are disabled.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for TextMessage

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedText Message.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

194

English

Page 197: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Text Message and press to

select.The current tone is indicated by a .

7 or to the required tone and press to

select. appears beside selected tone.

Escalating Alarm Tone Volume

You can program your radio to continually alert youwhen a radio call remains unanswered. This is doneby automatically increasing the alarm tone volumeover time. This feature is known as Escalert.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Escalert and press to select.

You can also use or to change the selected option.

6Press to enable/disable the Escalert.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Call Log FeaturesYour radio keeps track of all recent outgoing,answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call logfeature to view and manage recent calls.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

195

English

Page 198: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

You can perform the following tasks in each of yourcall lists:

• Delete• View Details

Viewing Recent Calls

The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Call Log and press to select.

3 or to preferred list and press to

select.The display shows the most recent entry at the topof the list.

4 or to view the list.Press the PTT button to start a Private Call withthe current selected alias or ID.

Deleting a Call from a Call List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Call Log and press to select.

3 or to the required list and press to

select.When you select a call list and it contains noentries, the display shows List Empty, andsounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page133).

4 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

5 or to Delete and press to select.

6 Do one of the following:Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

196

English

Page 199: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

•Press to select Yes to delete the entry.The display shows Entry Deleted.

• or to No, and press the button to

return to the previous screen.

Viewing Details from a Call List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Call Log and press to select.

3 or to the required list and press to

select.

4 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

5 or to View Details and press to

select.Display shows details.

Call Alert OperationCall Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radiouser to call you back when they are able to do so.

This feature is accessible through the menu viaContacts, manual dial or a programmed One TouchAccess button.

Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert

When you receive a Call Alert page, you see thenotification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID ofthe calling radio on the display.

When you hear a repetitive tone and the LEDblinks yellow, do one of the following:

• Press the PTT button while the display stillshows the Call Alert in the Notification List torespond with a Private Call.

•Press to exit the Notification List. The alertis moved to the Missed Call Log.

See Notification List on page 235 for details aboutthe Notification List.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

197

English

Page 200: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

See Call Log Features on page 195 for detailsabout the Missed Call List.

Making a Call Alert from the Contact List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

3 Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias directly

• or to the required subscriber alias

and press to select.• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial and press

to select.• The Manual Dial text entry screen shall be

displayed. Enter the Subscriber ID and

press .

4 or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The display shows Call Alert: <SubscriberAlias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriberalias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has beensent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows Call Alert Successful.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows Call Alert Failed.

Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button

• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias.The display shows Call Alert and thesubscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alerthas been sent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

198

English

Page 201: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows Call Alert Successful.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows Call Alert Failed.

Emergency OperationNote: If your radio is programmed for “Silent” or“Silent with voice” emergency initiation, in most casesit automatically exits silent operation after theEmergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. Theexception to this rule is when “Emergency Alert” is theconfigured Emergency Mode and “Silent” is theconfigured Emergency Type. If your radio isprogrammed in this manner, the silent operationcontinues until you cancel silent operation bypressing PTT or the button configured for“Emergency Off”.

Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are notsupported when operating in Connect Plus AutoFallback mode. For more information see the AutoFallback on page 181.

An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a criticalsituation. You can initiate an Emergency at any timeon any screen display, even when there is activity on

the current channel. Pressing the Emergency buttoninitiates the programmed Emergency mode. Theprogrammed Emergency mode may also be initiatedby triggering the optional Man Down feature. TheEmergency feature may be disabled in your radio.

Your dealer can set the duration of a button press forthe programmed Emergency button, except for longpress, which is similar with all other buttons:

• Short press – Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75seconds.

• Long press – Between 1.00 second and 3.75seconds.

The Emergency button is assigned with theEmergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer forthe assigned operation of the Emergency button.

• If the short press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then thelong press for the Emergency button is assignedto exit the Emergency mode.

• If the long press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then theshort press for the Emergency button is assignedto exit the Emergency mode.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

199

English

Page 202: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone,it supports three Emergency modes:

• Emergency Call – You must press the PTT buttonto talk on the assigned emergency time slot.

• Emergency Call with Voice to Follow – For thefirst transmission on the assigned emergency timeslot, the microphone is automatically unmuted andyou may talk without pressing the PTT button. Themicrophone stays “hot” in this fashion for a timeperiod programmed into the radio. For subsequenttransmissions in the same Emergency call, youmust press the PTT button.

• Emergency Alert – An Emergency Alert is not avoice call. It is an emergency notification that issent to radios that are configured to receive thesealerts. The radio sends an emergency alert via thecontrol channel of the currently registered site.The Emergency Alert is received by radios in theConnect Plus network that are programmed toreceive them (no matter which network site theyare registered to).

Only ONE of the Emergency Modes can be assignedto the Emergency button per zone. In addition, eachEmergency mode has the following types:

• Regular – Radio initiates an Emergency andshows audio and/or visual indicators.

• Silent – Radio initiates an Emergency without anyaudio or visual indicators. The radio will suppressall audio or visual indications of the Emergencyuntil you press the PTT button to start a voicetransmission.

• Silent with Voice – The same as Silent operation,except that the radio will also unmute for somevoice transmissions.

Receiving an Incoming Emergency

Your radio may be programmed to sound an alerttone and also display information about the incomingEmergency. If so programmed, upon receiving theincoming Emergency, the display shows theEmergency Details screen with the emergency icon,the Alias or ID of the radio that requested theEmergency, the Group Contact being used for theEmergency, and one additional line of information.The additional information is the name of the zonethat contains the Group Contact.

At the present time, the radio displays only the mostrecently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency isreceived before the prior Emergency is cleared, the

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

200

English

Page 203: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

details for the new Emergency replace the details ofthe previous Emergency.

Depending on how your radio has been programmed,the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen)will stay on your radio’s display even after theEmergency ends. You can save the emergencydetails to the Alarm List, or you can delete theemergency details as described in the followingsections.

Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List

Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allowsyou to view the details again at a later time byselecting Alarm List from the Main Menu.

While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List)

screen is displayed, press .

The Exit Alarm List screen displays.

Do one of the following.

•Select Yes and press to save theemergency details to the Alarm List, and to exitthe Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.

•Select No and press to return to theEmergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.

Deleting the Emergency Details

While the Emergency Details screen is displayed,

press .

The Delete screen displays.

Do one of the following.

•Select Yes and press to delete theemergency details.

•Select No and press to return to theEmergency Details screen.

Responding to an Emergency Call

Note: If you do not respond to the Emergency Callwithin the time allotted for the Emergency Call HangTime, the Emergency call will end. If you want tospeak to the group after the Emergency Call HangTime expires, you must first select the channelposition assigned to the group (if not already

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

201

English

Page 204: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

selected). Then, press PTT to start a non-EmergencyCall to the group.

1 When receiving an Emergency Call, press anybutton to stop all Emergency Call receivedindications.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voicetransmission on the Emergency group.All radios that are monitoring this group hear yourtransmission.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.The LED lights up green.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the emergency initiating radio responds, theLED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon,the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on yourdisplay.

Responding to an Emergency Alert

Note: The Group contact used for the EmergencyAlert should not be used for voice communication.This could prevent other radios from sending andreceiving Emergency Alerts on the same group.

An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that theuser is in an urgent situation. You may respond to thealert by initiating a private call to the radio whodeclared the emergency, initiating a group call to adesignated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert,initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. Theproper response is determined by your organizationand the individual situation.

Initiating an Emergency Call

Note: If your radio is set to Silent, it does not displayany audio or visual indicators during Emergencymode until you press the PTT button to initiate a voicetransmission.

If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does notinitially display any audio or visual indicators that theradio is in Emergency mode. However, your radio un-mutes for the transmissions of radios responding toyour emergency. The emergency indicators only

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

202

English

Page 205: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

appear once you press the PTT button to initiate avoice transmission from your radio.

For both “Silent” and “Silent with Voice” operation, theradio automatically exits silent operation after theEmergency Call is finished.

1 Press the programmed Emergency button.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voicetransmission on the Emergency group.

When you release the PTT button, the Emergencycall continues for the time allotted for theEmergency Call Hang Time.

If you press the PTT button during this time, theEmergency call continues.

Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow

Your radio must be programmed for this type ofoperation.

When enabled for this operation, when you press theprogrammed Emergency button, and when yourradio receives the time slot assignment, the

microphone is automatically activated withoutpressing the PTT button. This activated microphonestate is also known as “hot mic”. The “hot mic” appliesto the first voice transmission from your radio duringthe Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions inthe same Emergency call, you must press the PTTbutton.

1 Press the programmed Emergency button.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 The microphone remains active for the “hot mic”time specified in your radio's codeplugprogramming.During this time, the LED lights up green.

4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer thanthe programmed duration.

Initiating an Emergency Alert

Note: If your radio is programmed for “Silent” or“Silent with Voice”, it will not provide any audio orvisual indications that it is sending an EmergencyAlert. If programmed for “Silent”, the silent operationcontinues indefinitely until you press PTT or the

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

203

English

Page 206: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

button configured for “Emergency Off”. If programmedfor “Silent with Voice”, the radio automatically cancelssilent operation when the site controller broadcaststhe Emergency Alert.

Press the orange Emergency button.

Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the sitecontroller, the radio’s display shows theEmergency icon, the Group contact used for theEmergency Alert, and TX Alarm.

Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sentand is being broadcast for other radios to hear, apositive indicator tone sounds and the radio’sdisplay shows Alarm Sent. If the Emergency Alertis unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone soundsand the radio displays Alarm Failed.

Exiting Emergency Mode

Note: If the Emergency call ends due to theexpiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but theemergency condition is not over, press theEmergency button again to restart the process.

If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing theprogrammed Emergency button, your radio

automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving aresponse from the Connect Plus system.

If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing theprogrammed Emergency button, your radio will beassigned a channel automatically when one becomesavailable. Once your radio has transmitted amessage indicating the emergency, you cannotcancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressedthe button by accident or the emergency no longerexists, you may wish to say this over the assignedchannel. When you release the PTT button, theEmergency call is discontinued after the EmergencyCall Hang Time expires.

If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voiceto Follow, use the “hot mic” period to explain yourerror, then press and release the PTT button todiscontinue the transmission. The Emergency call isdiscontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Timeexpires.

Man Down AlarmsNote: Man Down Alarms are not supported whenoperating in Fallback mode. For more information seethe Auto Fallback on page 181.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

204

English

Page 207: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

This section describes the Connect Plus Man DownFeature. This is a purchasable feature that may ormay not apply to your radio.

Your Connect Plus portable radio can be enabled andprogrammed for one or more of the Man DownAlarms. Your dealer or radio system administrator cantell you whether or not this applies to your radio andwhich specific Man Down Alarms have been enabledand programmed.

If your radio has been programmed for one or more ofthe following Man Down Alarms, it is important for youto understand how the Alarm works, what indication(tones) your radio provides, and the action you shouldtake.

The purpose of the Man Down Alarms is to alertothers when you might be in danger. This isaccomplished by programming your radio to detect acertain angle of tilt, lack of movement, or movement,depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) is/areenabled. If your radio detects a disallowed movementtype, and if the condition is not corrected in a certainperiod of time, the radio starts to play an Alert Tone (ifso programmed). At this point you should immediatelytake one or more of the corrective actions discussedbelow, depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) has/

have been enabled for your radio. If you do not takecorrective action within a certain period of time, yourradio automatically starts an Emergency (either anEmergency Call or Emergency Alert).

• Tilt Alarm – When your radio is tilted at or beyonda specified angle for a period of time, it plays anAlert Tone (if so programmed). To prevent theradio from automatically starting an EmergencyCall or Emergency Alert, restore the radio to thevertical position immediately.

• Anti-Movement Alarm – When your radio ismotionless for a period of time, it plays an AlertTone (if so programmed). To prevent the radiofrom automatically starting an Emergency Call orEmergency Alert, move the radio immediately.

• Movement Alarm – When your radio is in motionfor a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if soprogrammed). To prevent the radio fromautomatically starting an Emergency Call orEmergency Alert, stop the radio’s motionimmediately.

Your dealer or radio system administrator can tell youwhich of the above alarms (if any) has been enabledthrough radio programming. It is possible to enableboth the Tilt and Anti- Movement Alarms. In that case,

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

205

English

Page 208: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

the Alert Tone plays when the radio detects the firstmovement violation.

Instead of taking the corrective actions discussedabove, you can also prevent the radio from startingthe Emergency call or Emergency Alert by using aprogrammable button, if your radio has beenconfigured in this manner. This is discussed in thenext two sections.

Turning Man Down Alarms On and Off

The procedure for turning the Man Down Alarms Onand Off depends on how your radio is programmed. Ifprogrammed with a Man Down Alarms On/Off button,use the button to toggle the Man Down Alarms Onand Off. This applies to all of the Man Down Alarmsenabled for your radio.

When using the programmable button to toggle theMan Down Alarms On, your radio plays a tone thatrises in pitch and displays a brief confirmationmessage.

When using the programmable button to toggle theMan Down Alarms Off, your radio plays a tone thatfalls in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.

In order to hear the tones described above whenturning the Man Down Alarms On and Off, the

MOTOTRBO radio and Connect Plus Option Boardmust both be enabled for keypad tones.

If your radio has been programmed so that ManDown Alarms can be turned On and Off via the menu,follow the procedure below.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

4 or to Man Down Alarm and press to

select.

If Man Down Alarm is currently disabled, theEnable option is shown.

If Man Down Alarm is currently enabled, theDisable option is shown.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

206

English

Page 209: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 or to Enable or Disable and press

to select.

Resetting the Man Down Alarms

If your radio has been programmed with either a ManDown Alarms Reset button, or the Man Down Alarmsmenu option, it is possible to reset the Man DownAlarms without turning them On or Off. This stops anyMan Down Alert Tone that is currently playing, and italso resets the Alarm timers. However, it is stillnecessary to correct the movement violation by takingthe appropriate corrective action described in the ManDown Alarms section. If the movement violation is notcorrected within a period of time, the Alert Tone startsplaying again.

The procedure for resetting the Man Down Alarmsdepends on how your radio is programmed. Ifprogrammed with a Man Down Alarms Reset button,use the button to Reset the Man Down Alarms. Thisapplies to all of the Man Down Alarms enabled foryour radio.

When using the programmable button to reset theMan Down Alarms, the radio shows a briefconfirmation message.

If your radio has been programmed so that ManDown Alarms can be Reset via the menu, follow theprocedure below.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

4 or to Man Down Alarm and press to

select.

5 or to Reset and press to select.

The radio displays a brief confirmation message.

Beacon FeatureThis section describes the Beacon feature. TheBeacon feature is part of Connect Plus Man Down, apurchasable feature. Your dealer or Radio System

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

207

English

Page 210: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Administrator can tell you if the Beacon featureapplies to your radio.

If your radio has been enabled and programmed forone or more of the Man Down Alarms, it can also beenabled for the Beacon feature.

If your radio automatically starts an Emergency Callor Emergency Alert due to one of the Man DownAlarms, and if your radio is also enabled for theBeacon feature, the radio starts to periodically emit ahigh pitched tone approximately once every tenseconds. The interval can vary depending on whetheryou are talking on your radio. The purpose of theBeacon tone is to help searchers locate you. If yourradio has also been enabled for the “Visual Beacon”,the radio’s backlight comes on for a few secondsevery time the Beacon tone plays.

You can stop your radio from playing the Beacon toneby using a programmable button, if your radio hasbeen configured in this manner. This is discussed inthe next two sections. If your radio does not have theprogrammable button or menu option, you can stopthe Beacon tone by turning the radio off and then onagain, or by changing to a different zone (if your radiohas been programmed for more than one zone).

Turning Beacon On and Off

The procedure for turning the Beacon On and Offdepends on how your radio is programmed. Ifprogrammed with a Beacon On/Off button, use thebutton to toggle the Beacon On and Off.

• When using the programmable button to togglethe Beacon On, your radio plays a tone that risesin pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.

• When using the programmable button to togglethe Beacon Off, your radio plays a tone that falls inpitch and shows a brief confirmation message.

In order to hear the tones described above whenturning the Beacon On and Off, the MOTOTRBOradio and Connect Plus Option Board must both beenabled for keypad tones. If your radio has beenprogrammed so that the Beacon can be turned Onand Off via the menu, follow the procedure below.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

208

English

Page 211: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

3 or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

4 or to Beacon and press to select.

If Beacon is currently disabled, the Enable optionis shown.

If Beacon is currently enabled, the Disable optionis shown.

5 or to Enable or Disable and press

to select.The radio shows a brief message to confirm thatMan Down Beacon was enabled (or disabled).

Resetting the Beacon

If your radio has been programmed with either theBeacon Reset button, or the Beacon menu option, itis possible to reset the Beacon. This stops theBeacon Tone (and also the Visual Beacon) withoutturning the Beacon feature Off. The procedure forresetting the Beacon depends on how your radio isprogrammed. If programmed with a Beacon Reset

button, use the button to Reset the Beacon. Whenusing the programmable button to reset the ManDown Alarms, your radio shows a brief confirmationmessage. If your radio has been programmed so thatthe Beacon can be Reset via the menu, follow theprocedure below.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

4 or to Beacon and press to select.

5 or to Reset and press to select.

The radio displays a brief confirmation message.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

209

English

Page 212: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Text Message FeaturesYour radio is able to receive data, for example a textmessage, from another radio or a text messageapplication.

The maximum length of characters for a textmessage is 140.

The radio exits the current screen once the inactivitytimer expires.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Writing and Sending a Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature.RadioControls

Steps

Programmed TextMessagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

RadioControls

Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

2 or to Compose and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

3 Use the keypad to type your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

4Press once message is composed.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

210

English

Page 213: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 If you are sending the message, select therecipient by

• or to the required alias and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 214).

Sending a Quick Text Message

Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Textmessages as programmed by your dealer.

While Quick Text messages are predefined, you canedit each message before sending it.

If you are sending the message, select therecipient by

• or to the required alias and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

211

English

Page 214: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 214).

Sending a Quick Text Message with the One TouchAccess Button

• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to send a predefined Quick Text messageto a predefined alias.The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 214).

Accessing the Drafts Folder

You can save a text message to send it at a latertime.

If a PTT button press or a mode change causes theradio to exit the text message writing/editing screen

while you are in the process of writing or editing a textmessage, your current text message is automaticallysaved to the Drafts folder.

The most recent saved text message is always addedto the top of the Drafts list.

The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) lastsaved messages. When the folder is full, the nextsaved text message automatically replaces the oldesttext message in the folder.

Note:

Long press at any time to return to the Homescreen.

Viewing a Saved Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

212

English

Page 215: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Controls Steps

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message

1Press again while viewing the message.

2 or to Edit and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

3 Use the keypad to type your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

4Press once message is composed.

5 Select the message recipient by

• or to the required alias and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

213

English

Page 216: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved tothe Sent Items folder and marked with a SendFailed icon.

Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

4 or to Delete and press to delete the

text message.

Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages

You can select one of the following options while atthe Resend option screen:

• Resend• Forward• Edit

Resending a Text Message

•Press to resend the same message to thesame subscriber/group alias or ID.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, the display showsnegative mini notice.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

214

English

Page 217: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Forwarding a Text Message

Select Forward to send the message to anothersubscriber/ group alias or ID.

1 or to Forward and press to select.

2 • or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Msssage, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

Editing a Text Message

Select Edit to edit the message before sending it.

1 or to Edit and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

2 Use the keypad to edit your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

3Press once message is composed.

4 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-edit, or delete the newly composed message, doone of the following.

• or to Send, and press to send the

message.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

215

English

Page 218: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• or to Save, and press to save the

message to the Drafts folder.•

to edit the message.•

to choose between deleting the messageor saving it to the Drafts folder.

5 If you are sending the message, select therecipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

Managing Sent Text Messages

Once a message is sent to another radio, it is savedin Sent Items. The most recent sent text message isalways added to the top of the Sent Items list.

The Sent Items folder is capable of storing amaximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When thefolder is full, the next sent text message automaticallyreplaces the oldest text message in the folder.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Viewing a Sent Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature.RadioControls

Steps

Programmed TextMessagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

216

English

Page 219: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControls

Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

2 or to Sent Items and press to

select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

The icon at the top right corner of the screenindicates the status of the message (see Sent ItemIcons on page 169).

Sending a Sent Text Message

You can select one of the following options whileviewing a sent text message:

• Resend

• Forward• Edit• Delete

1Press again while viewing the message.

2 or to one of the options described next

and press to select.Option Steps

Forward Select Forward to send the selectedtext message to another subscriber/group alias or ID (see Forwarding aText Message on page 215).

Edit Select Edit to edit the selected textmessage before sending it (see Editing a Text Message on page215).

Delete Select Delete to delete the textmessage.

Resend Select Resend to resend theselected text message to the samesubscriber/group alias or ID.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

217

English

Page 220: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Option Steps

The display shows SendingMessage, confirming that the samemessage is being sent to the sametarget radio.

If the message is sent successfully,a tone sounds and the displayshows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, alow tone sounds and the displayshows Message Send Failed.

If the message fails to send, theradio returns you to the Resend

option screen. Press to resendthe message to the samesubscriber/group alias or ID.

Note: If you exit the messagesending screen while the messageis being sent, the radio updates thestatus of the message in the SentItems folder without providing any

Option Steps

indication in the display or viasound.

Note: If the radio changes mode orpowers down before the status ofthe message in Sent Items isupdated, the radio cannot completeany In- Progress messages andautomatically marks it with a SendFailed icon.

Note: The radio supports amaximum of five (5) In-Progressmessages at one time. During thisperiod, the radio cannot send anynew message and automaticallymarks it with a Send Failed icon.

If you exit the message sending screen while themessage is being sent, the radio updates thestatus of the message in the Sent Items folderwithout providing any indication in the display orvia sound.

If the radio changes mode or powers down beforethe status of the message in Sent Items is

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

218

English

Page 221: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

updated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks itwith a Send Failed icon.

The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-Progress messages at one time. During thisperiod, the radio cannot send any new messageand automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.

Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Sent Items and press to

select.

When you select Sent Items and it contains notext messages, the display shows List Empty,and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turnedon (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page133).

3 or to Delete All and press to

select.

4 Choose one of the following.

• or to Yes and ppress to select.

The display shows positive mini notice.•

or to No and press to return to theprevious screen.

Receiving a Text Message

When your radio receives a message, the displayshows the Notification List with the alias or ID of thesender and the Message icon.

You can select one of the following options whenreceiving a text message:

• Read

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

219

English

Page 222: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Read Later• Delete

Reading a Text Message

1 or to Read? and press to select.

Selected message in the Inbox opens.

2 Do one of the following:

•Press to return to the Inbox.

•Press a second time to reply, forward, ordelete the text message.

Managing Received Text Messages

Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. TheInbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30messages.

Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according tothe most recently received.

Your radio supports the following options for textmessages:

• Reply• Forward• Delete• Delete All

Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital orCapacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not amatch, you can only forward, delete, or delete allReceived messages.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and press to select.

3 or to Inbox and press to select.

4 or toview the messages.

5 Do one of the following:

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

220

English

Page 223: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

•Press to select the current message, and

press again to reply, forward, or deletethat message.

•Long press to return to the Home screen.

Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature.RadioControls

Steps

Programmed TextMessagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

4Press once more to access the sub-menu.

5 Do one of the following:

• or to Reply and press to select.

• or to Quick Reply and press to

select.

A blinking cursor appears.

6 Use your keypad to write/edit your message.

7Press once message is composed.

The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

221

English

Page 224: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent,a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the message cannot be sent, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 214).

Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

4Press once more to access the sub-menu.

5 or to Delete and press to select.

6 or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows Message Deleted, and thescreen returns to the Inbox.

Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

222

English

Page 225: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Controls Steps

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

When you select Inbox and it contains no textmessages, the display shows List Empty, andsounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page133).

3 or to Delete All and press to

select.

4 or to Yes and press to

The display shows Inbox Cleared.

PrivacyIf enabled, this feature helps to preventeavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel

by the use of a software-based scrambling solution.The signaling and user identification portions of atransmission are not scrambled.

Your radio must have privacy enabled on the currentchannel selector position to send a privacy-enabledtransmission, although this is not a necessaryrequirement for receiving a transmission. While on aprivacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio isstill able to receive clear (unscrambled)transmissions.

Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy.

To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission,your radio must be programmed to have the sameKey Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as thetransmitting radio.

If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of adifferent Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing atall (Enhanced Privacy).

The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio isreceiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.

You can access this feature by

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

223

English

Page 226: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Pressing the programmed Privacy button totoggle privacy on or off.

• Using the Radio Menu as described by the stepsdescribed next.

Note: Some radio models may not offer this Privacyfeature. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings or or to

Connect Plus and press to select.

4 or to Enhanced Privacy.

If the display shows Turn On, press

to enable Privacy. The radio displays amessage confirming your selection.

OR

If the display shows Turn Off, press

to disable Privacy. The radio displays amessage confirming your selection.

If the radio has a privacy type assigned, thesecure or unsecure icon appears on the statusbar, except when the radio is sending or receivingan Emergency Alert.

Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call

Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacybutton or by using the menu. Your radio must havethe Privacy feature enabled for the currently selectedchannel position to send a privacy-enabledtransmission. When privacy is enabled for thecurrently selected channel position, all voicetransmissions made by your radio will be scrambled.This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-backduring scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call,and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the sameKey Value and Key ID as your radio will be able tounscramble the transmission.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

224

English

Page 227: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

SecurityYou can enable or disable any radio in the system.For example, you might want to disable a stolenradio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enablethat radio, when it is recovered.

Note: Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limitedto radios with these functions enabled. Check withyour dealer or system administrator for moreinformation.

Radio Disable

1 Access this feature byRadioControls

Steps

RadioDisablebutton

1 Press the programmed RadioDisable button.

2 or to the required alias or

ID and press to select.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

RadioControls

Steps

2 or to Contacts and

press to select. The entriesare alphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps describednext to select the requiredsubscriber alias or ID

• select the required alias or IDdirectly

• or to the required

alias or ID and press to select.

• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual

Dial and press toselect.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

225

English

Page 228: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControls

Steps

• or to Radio

Number and press toselect.

• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number:.the second line of thedisplay shows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypad toenter the subscriber alias

or ID and press .4 or to Radio Disable

and press to select.

The display shows Radio Disable: <TargetAlias or ID> and the LED blinks green.

2 Wait for acknowledgment.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display shows Radio Disable Successful.

If not successful, a negative indicator tone soundsand the display shows Radio Disable Failed.

Radio Enable

1 Access this feature byRadioControls

Steps

RadioEnablebutton

1 Press the programmed RadioEnable button.

2 or to the required alias or

ID and press to select.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press

to select. The entries arealphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps describednext to select the requiredsubscriber alias or IDA

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

226

English

Page 229: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControls

Steps

• select the required alias or IDdirectly

• or to the required

alias or ID and press to select.

• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial

and press to select.• or to Radio

Number and press toselect.

• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number: .the second line of thedisplay shows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypad to

RadioControls

Steps

enter the subscriber alias

or ID and press .4 or to Radio Enable and

press to select.

The display shows Radio Enable: <SubscriberAlias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.

2 Wait for acknowledgment.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display shows Radio Enable Successful.

If not successful, a negative indicator tone soundsand the display shows Radio Enable Failed.

Password Lock FeaturesIf enabled, this feature only allows you access yourradio if the correct password is entered uponpowering up.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

227

English

Page 230: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Accessing the Radio from Password

1 Power up your radio.You hear a continuous tone.

2 Do one of the following:

• Enter your current four-digit password with theradio’s keypad. The display shows . Press

to proceed.• Enter your current four-digit password. Press

or to edit each digit’s numeric value.

Each digit changes to . Press to move to

next digit. Press to confirm your selection.

You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit

entered. Press to remove the each on thedisplay. You hear a negative indicator tone, if you

press when the line is empty, or if you pressmore than four digits.

If the password is correct, your radio proceeds topower up. See Powering Up the Radio on page21.

If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password. Repeat Step 2 on page 228.

After the third incorrect password, the displayshows Wrong Password and then, shows RadioLocked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinksyellow.

Note: The radio is unable to receive any call,including emergency calls, in locked state.

Unlocking the Radio from Locked State

1 If your radio was powered down after being in thelocked state, power up the radio.A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.The display shows Radio Locked.

2 Wait for 15 minutes.Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for lockedstate when you power up.

3 Repeat Steps 1 on page 228 and 2 on page 228 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 228.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

228

English

Page 231: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Turning the Password Lock On or Off

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5 Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 on page 228 in Accessing the Radiofrom Password on page 228.

6Press to proceed.

If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.

7 If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, press to enable/disable passwordlock.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Changing the Password

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5 Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 on page 228 in Accessing the Radiofrom Password on page 228.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

229

English

Page 232: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

6Press to proceed.If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.

7 If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, or to Change Pwd and press to select.

8 Enter a new four-digit password.See Step 2 on page 228 in Accessing the Radiofrom Password on page 228.

9 Reenter the previously entered four-digitpassword. See Step 2 on page 228 in Accessingthe Radio from Password on page 228.

10Press to proceed.

If the reentered password matches the newpassword entered earlier, the display showsPassword Changed.

If the reentered password does NOT match thenew password entered earlier, the display showsPasswords Do Not Match.

The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.

Bluetooth OperationThis feature allows you to use your radio with aBluetooth enabled device (accessory) via a wirelessBluetooth connection. Your radio supports bothMotorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.

Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32feet) line of sight.This is an unobstructed pathbetween your radio and your Bluetooth-enableddevice.

It is not recommended that you leave your radiobehind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device towork with a high degree of reliability when they areseparated.

At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tonequality will start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. Tocorrect this problem, simply position your radio and

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

230

English

Page 233: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (withinthe 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to reestablishclear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth functionhas a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-meter/32 feet range.

Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneousBluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enableddevices of unique types. For example, a headset, anda PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections withBluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are notsupported.

Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device’s full capabilities.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to My Status and press to select.

The display shows On and Off. The current statusis indicated by a .

4 Do one of the following:

• or to On and press to select. The

display shows On and a appears left of theselected status.

• or to Off and press to select. The

display shows Off and a appears left of theselected status.

Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device

Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or

press during the finding and connectingoperation as this cancels the operation.

1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and placeit in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

2On your radio, press to access the menu.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

231

English

Page 234: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

3 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

4 or to Devices and press to select.

5 Do one of the following:

• or to the required device and press

to select.• or to Find Devices to locate available

devices. or to the required device and

press to select.

6 or to Connect and press to select.

Display shows Connecting to <Device>. YourBluetooth-enabled device may require additionalsteps to complete the pairing. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

If successful, the radio display shows<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and appearsbesides the connected device. The BluetoothConnected icon appears on the status bar.

If unsuccessful, the radio display shows ConnectingFailed .

Note: If pin code is required, use the same entrymethod as Step 2 on page 228 in Accessing theRadio from Password on page 228.

Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device(Discoverable Mode)

Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during thefinding and connecting operation as this may cancelthe operation.

1 Turn Bluetooth On.See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 127.

2 to access the menu.

3 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

4 or to Find Me and press to select.

Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed duration. Thisis called Discoverable Mode.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

232

English

Page 235: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair itwith your radio.Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual.

Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device

1On your radio, press to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Disconnect and press to

select.Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.Your Bluetooth-enabled device may requireadditional steps to disconnect. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. Apositive indicator tone sounds and disappearsbeside the connected device. The BluetoothConnected icon disappears on the status bar.

Switching Audio Route

You can toggle audio routing between internal radiospeaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.

Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switchbutton.

• A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Radio.

• A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Bluetooth.

Viewing Device Details

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

233

English

Page 236: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to View Details and press to

select.

Editing Device Name

You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enableddevices.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Edit Name and press to select.

6Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press to delete

any unwanted characters. Long press tochange text entry method.A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to typethe required zone.

7 The display shows Device Name Saved.

Deleting Device Name

You can remove a disconnected device from the listof Bluetooth-enabled devices.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

234

English

Page 237: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Delete and press to select.

The display shows Device Deleted.

Bluetooth Mic Gain

Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enableddevice’s microphone gain value.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to BT Mic Gain and press to

select.

4 or to the BT Mic Gain type and the currentvalues.

To edit values, press to select.

5 or to increase or to decrease values and

press to select.

Notification ListYour radio has a Notification List that collects all your“unread” events on the channel, such as unread textmessages, missed calls, and call alerts.

The Notification icon appears on the status bar whenthe Notification List has one or more events.

The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unreadevents. When it is full, the next event automaticallyreplaces the oldest event.

Note: After the events are read, they are removedfrom the Notification List.

Accessing the Notification List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Notification and press to

select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

235

English

Page 238: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

3 or to the required event and press to

select.

Long press to return to the Home Screen.

Utilities

Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off

You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) ifneeded.

Turning Keypad Tones On or Off

You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Keypad Tones and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable keypad tones.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level

You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level ifneeded. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voicevolume.

1 to access the menu.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

236

English

Page 239: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Vol. Offset and press to

select.

6 or to the required volume value.The radio sounds a feedback tone with eachcorresponding volume value.

7 Do one of the following:

•Press to keep the required displayedvolume value.

•Press to exit without changing the currentvolume offset settings.

Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Talk Permit and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

237

English

Page 240: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

6Press to enable/disable the Talk PermitTone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Toneif needed.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Power Up and press to select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable the Power Up AlertTone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Power Level

You can customize your radio’s power setting to highor low for each Connect Plus zone.

High enables communication with tower sites inConnect Plus mode located at a considerabledistance from you. Low enables communication withtower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity.

Press the programmed Power Level button to toggletransmit power level between high and low. Followthe procedure described next to access this featurevia the radio’s menus.

1 to access the menu.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

238

English

Page 241: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Power and press to select.

5 or to the required setting and press

to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time,

long press to return to the Home screen.Screen returns to the previous menu.

Changing the Display Mode

You can change radio’s display mode between Dayor Night, as needed. This affects the color palette ofthe display.

Change the Display Mode:

Radio Control Steps

ProgrammedDisplay ModeButton

Press the programmed DisplayMode button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

4 or to Display and

press to select.

The display shows DayMode and Night Mode.

Note: You can also use

or to change the selectedoption.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

239

English

Page 242: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Radio Control Steps

5 or to the required

setting and press toenable. appears besidesselected setting.

Adjusting the Display Brightness

You can adjust radio’s display brightness as needed.

Note: Display brightness cannot be adjusted when“Auto Brightness” is enabled.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Brightness and press to

select.The display shows a progress bar.

6Decrease display brightness by pressing or

increase the display brightness by pressing .

Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirmyour entry.

Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off

You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

240

English

Page 243: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Intro Screen and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable the IntroductionScreen.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Locking and Unlocking the Keypad

You can lock your radio’s keypad to avoid inadvertentkey entry.

To lock/unlock your radio’s keypad.Option Steps

Locking theKeypad

1 to access the menu.

Option Steps

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.4 or to Keypad Lock

and press to select.

You can also use or to changethe selected option.

Unlockingthe Keypad Press followed by .

After the keypad is locked, the display showsKeypad Locked and returns to the Home screen.

After the keypad is unlocked, the display showsKeypad Unlocked and returns to the Homescreen.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

241

English

Page 244: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Language

You can set your radio display to be in your requiredlanguage.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Languages and press to select.

You can also use or to change selectedoption.

5 or to the required language and press

to enable. appears beside selectedlanguage.

Turning the LED Indicator On or Off

You can enable and disable the LED Indicator ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to LED Indicator and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5Press to enable/disable the LED Indicator.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

242

English

Page 245: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Identifying Cable Type

You can select the type of cable your radio uses.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Cable Type and press to

select.

At Step 4, you can also use or to change theselected option.

5 The current cable type is indicated by a

Voice Announcement

This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate thecurrent Zone or Channel the user has just assigned,or programmable button press. This audio indicatorcan be customized per customer requirements. This

is typically useful when the user is in a difficultcondition to read the content shown on the display.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Voice Announcement and press

to select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Voice Announcement.The display shows beside Enabled.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

243

English

Page 246: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

•Press to disable Voice Announcement.The disappears from beside Enabled.

Menu Timer

Set the period of time your radio stays in the menubefore it automatically switches to the Home screen.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Menu Timer and press to

select.

6 or to the required setting and press

to select.

Setting the Squelch Level

You can adjust your radio's squelch level to filter outunwanted calls with low signal strength or channelsthat have a higher than normal background noise.

Normal is the default. Tight filters out (unwanted)calls and/or background noise; however, calls fromremote locations may also be filtered out.

Press the programmed Squelch button to togglesquelch level between normal and tight. Follow theprocedure described next to access this feature viathe radio’s menus.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

244

English

Page 247: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 or to Squelch and press to select.

5 or to the required setting and press

to select. appears besides selected setting. Screen

returns to the previous menu.

Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)

This feature controls the your radio's microphone gainautomatically while transmitting on a digital system. Itsuppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to apreset value in order to provide a consistent level ofaudio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 or to Mic AGC-D and press to select.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Mic AGC-D. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Mic AGC-D. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Intelligent Audio

Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volumeto overcome background noise in the environment,inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noisesources. This feature is a Receive-only feature anddoes not affect Transmit audio.

Note: This feature is not applicable during aBluetooth session.

1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

245

English

Page 248: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

RadioControl

Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Radio Settings and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings and

press to select.4 or to Intelligent Audio

and press to select.

Note: You can also use or tochange the selected option.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable IntelligentAudio. The display shows beside Enabled.

RadioControl

Steps

•Press to disable IntelligentAudio. The disappears frombeside Enabled.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Intelligent Audio and press

to select.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Intelligent Audio. Thedisplay shows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Intelligent Audio. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

246

English

Page 249: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature Onor Off

This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedbackin received calls.

Toggle Acoustic Feedback Suppressor FeaturesOn or OffRadio Control Steps

ProgrammedAcousticFeedbackSuppressorButton

Press the programmedAcoustic FeedbackSuppressor button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

Radio Control Steps

4 or to AF

Suppressor and press to select.

Note: You can also use

or to change the selectedoption.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enableAcoustic FeedbackSuppressor. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disableAcoustic FeedbackSuppressor. The disappears from besideEnabled.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

247

English

Page 250: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion ControlFeature On or Off

This feature allows you to enable the radio toautomatically monitor the microphone input andadjust the microphone gain value to avoid audioclipping.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 or to Mic Distortion and press to

select.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The display shows besideEnabled.

•Press to disable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The disappears frombeside Enabled.

Global Positioning System (GPS)

GPS is a satellite navigation system that determinesthe radio’s precise location. Press the programmedGPS button to toggle the feature on or off.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to GPS and press to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

248

English

Page 251: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5Press to enable/disable GPS

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

See Checking the GPS Information on page 159 fordetails on retrieving GPS information.

Text Entry Configuration

You can configure the following settings for enteringtext on your radio:

• Word Predict• Word Correct• Sentence Cap• My Words

Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

• Numbers• Symbols• Predictive or Multi-Tap• Language (If programmed)

Note: Press at any time to return to the previous

screen or long press to return to the HomeScreen. The radio exits the current screen once theinactivity timer expires.

Word Predict

Your radio can learn common word sequences thatyou often enter. It then predicts the next word youmay want to use after you enter the first word of acommon word sequence into the text editor.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

249

English

Page 252: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 or to Word Predict and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Word Predict. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Word Predict. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Sentence Cap

Automatically enables capitalization for the first letterin the first word for every new sentence.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to Sentence Cap and press to

select.

6 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Sentence Cap. Thedisplay shows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Sentence Cap. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Viewing Custom Words

You can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list tocontain these words.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

250

English

Page 253: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to List of Words and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

Editing Custom Word

You can edit the custom words saved in your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to List of Words and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

7 or to the required word and press to

select.

8 or to Edit and press to select.

9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

251

English

Page 254: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method. Press once your custom word iscompleted.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Adding Custom Word

You can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to Add New Word and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

252

English

Page 255: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

method. Press once your custom word iscompleted.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Deleting a Custom Word

You can delete the custom words saved in your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to the required word and press to

select.

7 or to Delete and press to select.

8 Choose one of the following.

•At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.

• or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Deleting All Custom Words

You can delete all custom words from your radio’s in-built.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

253

English

Page 256: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to Delete All and press to

select.

7 Choose one of the following.

•At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.

• or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Accessing General Radio Information

Your radio contains information on the following:

• Battery• Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer)• Radio Model Number Index• Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC• Site Number• Site Info• Radio Alias and ID• Firmware and Codeplug Versions• GPS Information

Press at any time to return to the previous

screen or long press to return to the Homescreen. The radio exits the current screen once theinactivity timer expires.

Accessing the Battery Information

Displays information on your radio battery.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

254

English

Page 257: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Battery Info and press to

select.

The display shows the battery information.

For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display readsRecondition Battery if the battery requiresreconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After thereconditioning process, the display then shows thebattery information.

Checking the Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer)

Note: The measurement on the display shows the

degree of tilt at the moment you press to acceptthe Accelerometer option. If you change the angle

of the radio after pressing , the radio does notchange the measurement shown on its display. Itcontinues to display the measurement taken when

was pressed.

If the portable radio has been enabled for the ManDown Alarms, there is a menu option to check howthe radio measures the degree of tilt. This is a helpfulfeature when the dealer or Radio SystemAdministrator uses the MOTOTRBO Connect PlusOption Board CPS programming software toconfigure the activation angle that will trigger the tiltalarm.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

255

English

Page 258: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 Tilt the radio at the angle that triggers the TiltAlarm.

5 or to Accelerometer and press to

select.The display shows the radio’s angle of tilt(deviation from perpendicular vertical position) indegrees (example: 62 Deg.) Based on this, useMOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS toconfigure the Activation Angle for 60 degrees(which is the closest programmable value). TheTilt Alarm timers are triggered when the ActivationAngle is 60 degrees, or greater.

Checking the Radio Model Number Index

This index number identifies your radio’s model-specific hardware. Your radio system administratormay ask for this number when preparing a newOption Board codeplug for your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Model Index and press to

select.The display shows the Model Number Index.

Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTACodeplug File

Follow the instructions below if your radio systemadministrator asks you to view the Option Board OTACodeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). Thismenu option only appears if the Option Boardreceived its last codeplug update OTA.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

256

English

Page 259: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

4 or to OB OTA CPcrc and press to

select.The display shows some letters and numbers.Communicate this information to your radiosystem administrator exactly as shown.

Displaying the Site ID (Site Number)

Note: If you are not currently registered at a site, thedisplay shows Not Registered.

The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers witha Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radiodoes not generally indicate the Site number. Todisplay the registered Site number, do the following:

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Site Number and press to

select.The display shows the Network ID and the SiteNumber.

Checking the Site Info

Note: If you are not currently registered at a site, thedisplay shows Not Registered.

The Site Info feature provides information that can beuseful to a service technician. It consists of thefollowing information:

• Repeater number of current Control Channelrepeater.

• RSSI: Last signal strength value measured fromControl Channel repeater.

• Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater(five numbers separated by commas).

If you are requested to use this feature, please reportthe displayed information exactly as it appears on thescreen.

1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

257

English

Page 260: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Site Info and press to select.

The display shows the Site Info.

Checking the Radio ID

This feature displays the ID of your radio.

Follow the procedure described next to access thisfeature via the radio screen.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to My ID and press to select.

The display shows the radio ID.

Checking the Firmware Version and CodeplugVersion

Displays the firmware version on your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Versions and press to select.

The display a list with the following information:

• (Radio) Firmware Version• (Radio) Codeplug Version• Option Board Firmware Version• Option Board Frequency Version• Option Board Hardware Version

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

258

English

Page 261: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Option Board Codeplug Version

Checking for Updates

Connect Plus provides the ability to update certainfiles (Option Board Codeplug, Network FrequencyFile and Option Board Firmware File) over-the-air.

Note: Check with the dealer or network administratorto determine whether this feature has been enabledfor your radio.

Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability toshow its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC,Frequency File version or Option Board firmware fileversion via a menu option. In addition, display radiosthat have been enabled for over-the-air file transfercan display the version of a "pending file". A "pendingfile" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware filethat the Connect Plus radio knows about via systemmessaging, but the radio has not yet collected all ofthe file’s packets. If a display Connect Plus radio hasa pending file, the menu provides options to:

• See the version number of the pending file• See what percentage of packets has been

collected so far

• Request the Connect Plus radio to resumecollecting file packets

If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus over-the-airfile transfer, there may be times when the radioautomatically joins a file transfer without first notifyingthe radio user. While the radio is collecting filepackets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radiodisplays the High Volume Data icon on the HomeScreen status bar.

Note: The Connect Plus radio cannot collect filepackets and receive calls at the same time. If youwish to cancel the file transfer, press and release thePTT button. This causes the radio to request a call onthe selected Contact Name, and it will also cancel thefile transfer for that radio until the process resumes ata later time.

There are several things that can make the filetransfer process start again. The first example appliesto all over-the-air file types. The other examples applyonly to the Network Frequency File and Option BoardFirmware File:

• The radio system administrator re-initiates theover-the-air file transfer.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

259

English

Page 262: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• The Option Board's pre-defined timer expires,which causes the Option Board to automaticallyresume the process of collecting packets.

• The timer has not yet expired, but the radio userrequests the file transfer to resume via the menuoption.

After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading allfile packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquiredfile. For the Network Frequency File, this is anautomatic process and does not require a radio reset.For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is anautomatic process that will cause a brief interruptionto service as the Option Board loads the newcodeplug information and re-acquires a network site.How quickly the radio upgrades to a new OptionBoard firmware file depends on how the radio hasbeen configured by the dealer or systemadministrator. The radio will either upgradeimmediately after collecting all file packets, or it willwait until the next time that the user turns the radioon.

Note: Check with your dealer or system administratorto determine how your radio has been programmed.

The process of upgrading to a new Option Boardfirmware file takes several seconds, and it requires

the Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio.Once the upgrade starts, the radio use will not beable to make or receive calls until the process iscompleted.

Firmware FileFirmware Up to Date

Note: If the Option Board firmware file is not Up toDate (and if the radio has partially collected a morerecent Option Board firmware file version) the radiodisplays a list with additional options; Version,%Received, and Download.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

260

English

Page 263: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 or to Firmware and press to select.

The display shows Firmware is Up to Date.

Pending Firmware – Version

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

5 or to Firmware and press to select.

6 or to Version and press to select.

If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,the display shows the pending firmware versionnumber.

If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,the display shows Firmware is Up to Date

Pending Firmware – % Received

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

5 or to Firmware and press to select.

6 or to %Received and press to select.

The screen displays the percentage of firmwarefile packets collected so far.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

261

English

Page 264: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Note: When at 100%, the radio needs to be powercycled Off and then On to initiate the firmwareupgrade.

Pending Firmware – Download

If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTAOption Board Firmware File Transfer with a partialfile, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (ifstill ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If youwant the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option BoardFirmware File transfer prior to expiration of thisinternal timer, use the Download option as describedbelow.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

5 or to Firmware and press to select.

6 or to Download and press to select.

The display shows the following:

Download Available Start Download

No DownloadAvailable

Download notavailable

7 Do one of the following:

•Select Yes and press to start thedownload.

•Select No and press to return to theprevious menu.

Frequency FileFrequency File Up to Date

Note: If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and ifthe radio has partially collected a more recentfrequency file version) the radio displays a list with

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

262

English

Page 265: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

additional options; Version, %Received, andDownload.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Frequency and press to select.

The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date.

Frequency File Pending – Version

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

5 or to Frequency and press to select.

6 or to Version and press to select.

If there is a pending Frequency File, the displayshows the pending Frequency File versionnumber.

Frequency File Pending — % Received

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

263

English

Page 266: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

5 or to %Received and press to select.

The screen displays the percentage of frequencyfile packets collected so far.

Frequency File Pending – Download

If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTANetwork Frequency File Transfer with a partial file,the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if stillongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you wantthe unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency Filetransfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, usethe Download option as described below.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

5 or to Frequency and press to select.

6 or to Download and press to select.

Download CurrentlyUnavailable

Download notavailable

Download CurrentlyAvailable

Start Download

7 Do one of the following:

• Select Yes and press to start the download.• Select No and press to return to the previous

menu.

Checking the GPS Information

Displays the GPS information on your radio, such asvalues of:

• Latitude• Longitude• Altitude• Direction• Velocity

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

264

English

Page 267: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)• Satellites• Version

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to GPS Info and press to select.

5 or to the required item and press to

select.The display shows the requested GPSinformation.

See Global Positioning System (GPS) on page 149for details on GPS.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

265

English

Page 268: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Accessories

Antennas• UHF, 403 – 527MHz, Whip Antenna

(PMAE4068_)• UHF, 403 – 527MHz, Slim Whip Antenna

(PMAE4079_)• UHF, 403 – 450MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4069_)• UHF, 440 – 490MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4070_• UHF, 470 – 527MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4071_)• UHF, 470 – 527MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4071_)• VHF, 144 – 165MHz, Helical Antenna

(PMAD4116_)• VHF, 136 – 155MHz, Helical Antenna

(PMAD4117_)• VHF, 152 – 174MHz, Helical Antenna

(PMAD4118_)• VHF, 136 – 148MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAD4119_)

• VHF, 146 – 160MHz, Stubby Antenna(PMAD4120_)

• VHF, 160 – 174MHz, Stubby Antenna(PMAD4121)

• VHF, 360 – 400MHz, Stubby Antenna(PMAD4133_)

• VHF, 350 – 380MHz, Stubby Antenna(PMAD4136_)

• VHF, 350 – 400MHz, Whip Antenna(PMAD4139_)

• 800/900, 806 – 870MHz, Whip Antenna(PMAF4011_)

• 800/900, 896 – 941MHz, Whip Antenna(PMAF4012_)

Batteries• Core NiMH, 1300mAh Battery (PMNN4412_)

[7]

• Core Slim Li-Ion, 1500 mAh Battery (PMNN4406_)[8]

• IMPRES Li-Ion, 1500 mAh Slim Battery(PMNN4407_)[8]

Acc

esso

ries

266

English

Page 269: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2150 mAh Battery(PMNN4409_)[8]

• IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2300 mAh Battery(FM) (NNTN8129_)

For use with 350 band only:

• IMPRES Li-Ion, 2300 mAh Battery (PMNN4424_)• IMPRES Li-Ion, 2700 mAh Battery (PMNN4448_)• Li-Ion, 1400 mAh Battery (PMNN4435_)

[9]

Carry Devices• 2.5-Inch Replacement Leather Swivel Belt Loop

(PMLN5610_)

• 3-Inch Replacement Leather Swivel Belt Loop(PMLN5611_)

• Hard Leather Carry Case with 3-Inch Fixed BeltLoop for Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN5838_)

• Hard Leather Carry Case with 3-Inch Swivel BeltLoop for Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN5840_)

• Hard Leather Carry Case with 2.5-Inch Swivel BeltLoop for Full-Keypad and Limited-Keypad Radio(PMLN5842_)

• Nylon Carry Case with 3-Inch Fixed Belt Loop forFull-Keypad and Limited-Keypad Radio(PMLN5844_)

• Belt Clip for 2-Inch Belt Width (PMLN4651_)• Belt Clip for 2.5-Inch Belt Width (PMLN7008_)

Chargers• IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger, US plug

(WPLN4212_)• IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger, 110–230 V, Euro

Plug (WPLN4213_)

7 Not applicable to the 800/900 bands.8 Available for the 350 band in April 2014.9 Available in December 2013.

Accessories

267

English

Page 270: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger, Argentina Plug(WPLN4216_)

• IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger with Display, US plug(WPLN4219_)

• IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger with Display, 110–230V, Euro Plug (WPLN4220_)

• IMPRES Single-Unit Charger, US plug(WPLN4232_)

• IMPRES Single-Unit Charger with Display, UKPlugArgentina Plug (WPLN4233_)

• IMPRES Single-Unit Charger, Euro Plug(WPLN4234_)

• Core Single Unit Charger (NNTN8117_)•• IMPRES Single Unit Charger, Brazil Plug

(WPLN4281_)• IMPRES Single-Unit Charger, 220–240 V, 50 Hz,

Argentina Plug (WPLN4236_)• Core Single Unit Charger, with Power Supply,

Argentina Plug (NNTN8225_)• Single Unit Charger, Euro Plug (NNTN8273_)• Single Unit Charger, US/NA Plug (NNTN8275_)• Core Single Unit Charger, with Power Supply,

Brazil Plug (NNTN8280_)• IMPRES Vehicular Charger (NNTN7616_)

• IMPRES Battery Reader (NNTN7392_)

Earbuds and Earpieces• Receive-Only Earbud (AARLN4885_)• Receive-Only Earbud (MDRLN4885)• D-Shell Receive-Only Earpiece (PMLN4620_)• Receive-Only Earpiece (RLN4941_)• Standard Earpiece, Black (RLN6279_)• Standard Earpiece, Beige (RLN6280_)• Earpiece with Acoustic Tube Assembly, Beige

(RLN6284_)• Earpiece with Acoustic Tube Assembly, Black

(RLN6285_)• Earpiece with High Noise Kit, Beige (RLN6288_)• Earpiece with High Noise Kit, Black (RLN6289_)• 1-Wire Earbud, 29cm Cord, Black (NNTN8294_)• 1-Wire Earbud,116cm Cord, Black (NNTN8295_)• Over-the-Ear Receiver for Remote Speaker

Microphone (WADN4190_)• D-Shell Earset (PMLN5096_)• IMPRES Temple Transducer with In-line Push-to-

Talk (PMLN5101_)• Replacement Foam Ear Pad and Windscreen

(RLN6283_)

Acc

esso

ries

268

English

Page 271: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Replacement Ear Seal Cloth Cover (1580376E32)• Replacement Boom Mic Windscreen

(5080548E02)• Replacement Windscreen O-Ring (3280376E35)• Wireless Earpiece Maintenance Kit (NTN8821_)• Replacement Ear Tips Kit for Wireless Ear Buds

(NNTN8316_)• Replacement Ear Tubes for CommPort Earpiece,

Pack of 10 (RLN5037_)• Ear Straps for CommPort Earpiece (for Secure

Attachment to Ear), Pack of 10 (NTN8988_)• Replacement Eartips for Operations Critical

Wireless Earbuds (NNTN8299_)

Headsets and Headset Accessories• Ultra-Lite Headset (PMLN5102_)• Heavy Duty Noise-Canceling Headset

(PMLN5275_)• Lightweight Headset (RMN5058_)• Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk

Device with Push-to-Talk Audio, 12-Inch Cable(NNTN8125_)

• Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-TalkDevice with Push-to-Talk Audio, 9.5-Inch Cable(NNTN8126_)

• Non-Secure Wireless Push-to-Talk Device(NNTN8127_)

• Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk Device withPush-to-Talk Audio, 12–Inch Cable, ArgentinaPlug (NNTN8281_)

• Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk Device withPush-to-Talk Audio, 12–Inch Cable, Brazil Plug(NNTN8282_)

• Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk Device withPush-to-Talk Audio, 12–Inch, Euro Plug(NNTN8364_)

• Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk Device withPush-to-Talk Audio, 9.5–Inch, Argentina Plug(NNTN8283_)

• Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk Device withPush-to-Talk Audio, 9.5–Inch, Brazil Plug(NNTN8284_)

• Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk Device withPush-to-Talk Audio, 9.5–Inch, Euro Plug(NNTN8365_)

• Wireless Push-to-Talk Device, Argentina Plug(NNTN8285_)

Accessories

269

English

Page 272: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Wireless Push-to-Talk Device, Brazil Plug(NNTN8286_)

• Wireless Push-to-Talk Device, Euro Plug(NNTN8363_)

• XBT Behind-the-Neck, Non-Secure WirelessHeavy Duty Headset (RLN6490_)

• XBT Overhead, Non-Secure Wireless Heavy DutyHeadset (RLN6491_)

• Replacement Earpiece 12–Inch Cable (forNNTN8125_)(NTN2572_)

• Replacement Earpiece 9.5–Inch Cable (forNNTN8126_)(NTN2575_)

• Headband for XBT Headset (RLN6492_)• Behind-the-Neck band for XBT Headset

(RLN6493_)• Boom Mic for XBT Headset (RLN6495_)• Cooling Pads for XBT Headset (RLN6496_)• Hygiene Kit for XBT Headset (RLN6497_)• Universal 5V PSU for XBT Headset (RLN6498_)

Remote Speaker Microphones• Remote Speaker Microphone (PMMN4024_)• IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone

(PMMN4025_)

• Remote Speaker Microphone, Submersible (IP57)(PMMN4040_)

• IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, withVolume, IP57 (PMMN4046_)

• IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, withEarjack, Noise-Canceling (PMMN4050_)

• Remote Speaker Microphone Replacement CoilCord Kit (For Use with PMMN4024_ andPMMN4040_) (RLN6074_)

• Remote Speaker Microphone Replacement CoilCord Kit (For Use with PMMN4025_,PMMN4046_, PMMN4050_) (RLN6075_)

• IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, IP57(NNTN8382_)

• IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, withEarjack (NNTN8383_)

Surveillance Accessories• Receive Only Surveillance Kit, Black (Single Wire)

(PMLN6125_)• Receive Only Surveillance Kit, Beige (Single Wire)

(PMLN6126_)• Surveillance Low Noise Kit (RLN5886_)• Surveillance High Noise Kit (RLN5887_)

Acc

esso

ries

270

English

Page 273: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit, Black(PMLN6127_)

• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit, Beige(PMLN6128_)

• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (RLN5882_)

• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (PMLN6129_)

• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Beige(PMLN6130_)

• IMPRES 3-Wire Surveillance, Black (PMLN5097_)• IMPRES 3-Wire Surveillance, Beige (PMLN5106_)• IMPRES 3–Wire Surveillance with Clear,

Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (PMLN6123_)• IMPRES 3–Wire Surveillance with Clear,

Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Beige (PMLN6124_)• Low Noise Kit with Translucent Tube and 1 Clear

Rubber Ear Tip (RLN6242_)• Replacement Foam Plugs, Pack of 50 (For Use

with RLN5886_) (RLN6281_)• Replacement Ear Tips, Clear, Pack of 50 (For Use

with RLN5887_) (RLN6282_)• Small Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Right

Ear (RLN4760_)

• Medium Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,Right Ear (RLN4761_)

• Large Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,Right Ear (RLN4762_)

• Small Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, LeftEar (RLN4763_)

• Medium Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,Left Ear (RLN4764_)

• Large Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, LeftEar (RLN4765_)

Miscellaneous Accessories• Universal Chest Pack (HLN6602_)• Waterproof Bag, Includes Large Carry Strap

(HLN9985_)• Shoulder Strap (Attaches to D-Ring on Carry

Case) (NTN5243_)• Small Clip, Epaulet Strap (RLN4295_)• Break-A-Way Chest Pack (RLN4570_)• Universal RadioPAK and Utility Case (Fanny

Pack) (RLN4815_)• Replacement Strap for RLN4570_ and HLN6602_

Chest Packs (1505596Z02)• Universal RadioPAK Extension Belt (4280384F89)

Accessories

271

English

Page 274: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

• Belt (4200865599)

Acc

esso

ries

272

English

Page 275: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Batteries and Chargers Warranty

The Workmanship WarrantyThe workmanship warranty guarantees againstdefects in workmanship under normal use andservice.

All MOTOTRBOBatteries

Two (2) Years

IMPRES Chargers(Single-Unit and Multi-Unit, Non-Display)

Two (2) Years

IMPRES Chargers (Multi-Unit with Display)

One (1) Year

The Capacity WarrantyThe capacity warranty guarantees 80% of the ratedcapacity for the warranty duration.

Nickel Metal-Hydride(NiMH) or Lithium-Ion (Li-lon) Batteries

12 Months

IMPRES Batteries, WhenUsed Exclusively withIMPRES Chargers

18 Months

Batteries and C

hargers Warranty

273

English

Page 276: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Limited Warranty

MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS

I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FORHOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (“MOTOROLA”)warrants the MOTOROLA manufacturedCommunication Products listed below (“Product”)against defects in material and workmanship undernormal use and service for a period of time from thedate of purchase as scheduled below:

DGP Series DigitalPortable Radios

Two (2) Years

Product Accessories(Excluding Batteries andChargers)

One (1) Year

MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge eitherrepair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts),replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), orrefund the purchase price of the Product during the

warranty period provided it is returned in accordancewith the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts orboards are warranted for the balance of the originalapplicable warranty period. All replaced parts ofProduct shall become the property of MOTOROLA.

This express limited warranty is extended byMOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser onlyand is not assignable or transferable to any otherparty. This is the complete warranty for the Productmanufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLAassumes no obligations or liability for additions ormodifications to this warranty unless made in writingand signed by an officer of MOTOROLA.

Unless made in a separate agreement betweenMOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser,MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation,maintenance or service of the Product.

MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way forany ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLAwhich is attached to or used in connection with theProduct, or for operation of the Product with anyancillary equipment, and all such equipment isexpressly excluded from this warranty. Because eachsystem which may use the Product is unique,MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or

Lim

ited

War

rant

y

274

English

Page 277: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

operation of the system as a whole under thiswarranty.

II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:This warranty sets forth the full extent ofMOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product.Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price,at MOTOROLA’s option, is the exclusive remedy.THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALLOTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THISLIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALLMOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES INEXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THEPRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OFTIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS,LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHERINCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE ORINABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THEFULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BYLAW.

III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSIONOR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ONHOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SOTHE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAYNOT APPLY.

This warranty gives specific legal rights, and theremay be other rights which may vary from state tostate.

IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the dateof purchase and Product item serial number) in orderto receive warranty service and, also, deliver or sendthe Product item, transportation and insuranceprepaid, to an authorized warranty service location.Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLAthrough one of its authorized warranty servicelocations. If you first contact the company which soldyou the Product (e.g., dealer or communicationservice provider), it can facilitate your obtainingwarranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at1-800-927-2744 US/Canada.

Limited W

arranty

275

English

Page 278: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOTCOVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of theProduct in other than its normal and customarymanner.

2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water,or neglect.

3 Defects or damage from improper testing,operation, maintenance, installation, alteration,modification, or adjustment.

4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless causeddirectly by defects in material workmanship.

5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Productmodifications, disassembles or repairs (including,without limitation, the addition to the Product ofnon-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) whichadversely affect performance of the Product orinterfere with MOTOROLA's normal warrantyinspection and testing of the Product to verify anywarranty claim.

6 Product which has had the serial number removedor made illegible.

7 Rechargeable batteries if:

1 any of the seals on the battery enclosure ofcells are broken or show evidence oftampering.

2 the damage or defect is caused by charging orusing the battery in equipment or service otherthan the Product for which it is specified.

8 Freight costs to the repair depot.9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized

alteration of the software/firmware in the Product,does not function in accordance withMOTOROLA’s published specifications or the FCCcertification labeling in effect for the Product at thetime the Product was initially distributed fromMOTOROLA.

10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Productsurfaces that does not affect the operation of theProduct.

11 Normal and customary wear and tear.

VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suitbrought against the end user purchaser to the extentthat it is based on a claim that the Product or partsinfringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA willpay those costs and damages finally awarded against

Lim

ited

War

rant

y

276

English

Page 279: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

the end user purchaser in any such suit which areattributable to any such claim, but such defense andpayments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly inwriting by such purchaser of any notice of suchclaim,

2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of thedefense of such suit and all negotiations for itssettlement or compromise, and

3 should the Product or parts become, or inMOTOROLA’s opinion be likely to become, thesubject of a claim of infringement of a UnitedStates patent, that such purchaser will permitMOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either toprocure for such purchaser the right to continueusing the Product or parts or to replace or modifythe same so that it becomes non-infringing or togrant such purchaser a credit for the Product orparts as depreciated and accept its return. Thedepreciation will be an equal amount per year overthe lifetime of the Product or parts as establishedby MOTOROLA.

MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to anyclaim of patent infringement which is based upon thecombination of the Product or parts furnished

hereunder with software, apparatus or devices notfurnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA haveany liability for the use of ancillary equipment orsoftware not furnished by MOTOROLA which isattached to or used in connection with the Product.The foregoing states the entire liability ofMOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patentsby the Product or any parts thereof.

Laws in the United States and other countriespreserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights forcopyrighted MOTOROLA software such as theexclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distributecopies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLAsoftware may be used in only the Product in whichthe software was originally embodied and suchsoftware in such Product may not be replaced,copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used toproduce any derivative thereof. No other useincluding, without limitation, alteration, modification,reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering ofsuch MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights insuch MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license isgranted by implication, estoppel or otherwise underMOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights.

Limited W

arranty

277

English

Page 280: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

VII. GOVERNING LAW:This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State ofIllinois, U.S.A.

Lim

ited

War

rant

y

278

English

Page 281: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE
Page 282: MOTOTRBO™ DGP™ 5550/DGP™ 8550 USER GUIDE

Motorola Solutions, Inc.1303 East Algonquin RoadSchaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A.

MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license.All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. © 2012, 2013 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. November 2013.www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo

*68009487001*68009487001-F